2018 Nissan Frontier | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

User Manual: 2018-frontier

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 498

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018

FRONTIER

OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

FOREWORD
Welcome to the growing family of new
NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to
you with confidence. It was produced using
the latest techniques and strict quality
control.
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT
REMINDERS!

SAFETY

INFORMATION

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the
rear seat.

∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive
mark is placed at the bemodels, a
ginning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss
of control or a collision. For additional
information, refer to “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center
of gravity for off-road use. As with
other vehicles with features of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident.

For additional information, refer to
“On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions”, “Avoiding collision and
rollover” and “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage
or
performance
problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle.
For
more
information
go
to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscription after trial
period and are sold
separately or as a
package. The
satellite service is
available only in the
48 contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM®
satellite service is
also available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

– Your name, address, and telephone
number

For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase

For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-73)
Head restraints/headrests (P.1-10)
Front seat belts with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-15, 1-73)
Supplemental front-impact air
bags (P.1-73)
Seats (P. 1-2)
Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P. 1-73)
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-73)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (P. 1-28)
Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-28)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2310

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Engine hood (P. 3-10)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)
Windshield (P. 8-20)
Windows (P. 2-49)
Door locks (P. 3-3)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)
Keys (P. 3-2)
Mirrors (P. 3-15)
Tire pressure (P. 8-32)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-32)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
Daytime running lights system
(if so equipped) (P. 2-29)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-29)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2481

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Rear sliding window
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
Vehicle loading (P. 10-19)
Tailgate (P. 3-18)
Truck box (P. 3-18)
Rearview camera (P. 4-10)
Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)
(P. 5-42)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-11)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2482

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Power moonroof
(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)
Map lights (P. 2-54)
Sun visors (P. 3-14)
Rearview mirror (P. 3-15)
HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)
Glove box (P. 2-40)
Shift lever (P. 5-14)
Cup holders (P. 2-40)
Console box (P. 2-40)
Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII2483

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2484

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Vents (P. 4-17)
Headlight/fog light
(if so equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-71)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-78, 4-90)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-73)
Horn (P. 2-33)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-14)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-22)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)
Storage (P. 2-40)
Audio system (P. 4-32)
Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-73)
Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)
Passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-73)
USB connection port (P. 4-58)
AUX input (P. 4-58)
Power outlets (P. 2-39)

15.

16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.

Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
Heated seat switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-34)
Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-39)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-35)
Shift lever (P. 5-14)
4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-26)
Climate controls (P. 4-17, P. 4-27)
Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
Ignition switch (P. 5-11)
Tilt steering wheel control
(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)
Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)
Clutch interlock (clutch start)
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)
Hill descent control switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)
Outside mirror controls
(if so equipped) (P. 3-15)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Fuse box (P. 8-22)
Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
Drive belt location (P.8-16)
Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-11)
Battery (P. 8-14)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

WDI0643

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VQ40DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)
Fuse box (P. 8-22)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
Drive belt location (P.8-16)
Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 8-11)
Battery (P. 8-14)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

*Engine cover removed for clarity.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.

LII0167

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Warning
light

Name

Page

4WD warning light
(
model)

2-15

Charge warning
light

2-17

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

2-15

Door open warning light

2-17

Engine oil pressure warning light

2-17

Low fuel warning
light

2-18

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-18

Automatic transmission oil temperature warning
light (if so
equipped)

2-16

Automatic transmission park
warning light
(
model)

2-16

Low windshieldwasher fluid
warning light (if so
equipped)

2-20

Brake warning
light

2-16

Seat belt warning
light and chime

2-20

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator
light

Name

Page

4WD shift indicator light (
model)

2-21

Automatic transmission position
indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-21

Cruise main
switch indicator
light

2-21

Cruise set switch
indicator light

2-21

Electronic locking
rear differential
(E-Lock) system
ON indicator light
(if so equipped)

2-21

Front passenger
air bag status
light

2-21

Indicator
light

Name

Page

High beam indicator light (blue)

2-21

Hill descent control system ON
indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-21

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-22

Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)

2-23

Security indicator
light (if so
equipped)

2-23

Slip indicator light

2-23

Transfer 4LO position indicator light
(
model)

2-23

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights

2-24

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-24

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Rear bench seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Jump seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Armrest (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Front-seat active head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH (Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH — jump seat
(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts (Crew Cab models). . . . . . 1-40

Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts — jump seat
(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH
(Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH — jump seat
(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts — front
passenger and rear bench seat
(Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts — front
passenger and jump seats
(King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-88
Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-89

SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

ARS1152

WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.

WRS0175

WRS0176

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the
seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.

WRS0131

WRS0389

Seat lifter (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)

Lumbar support (if so equipped
for driver’s seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and
height of the seat cushion to the desired
position.

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver.
Move the lever forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2897

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Operating tips
∙ The power seat motor has an autoreset overload protection circuit. If the
motor stops during operation, wait
30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired
position.

Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

LRS2898

WRS0389

LRS2903

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

REAR BENCH SEAT (if so equipped)

Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle and height of the seat cushion.

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver.
Move the lever forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

The rear bench seat is non-adjustable.
However, the seats can be folded up and
folded to lay flat. For additional information,
refer to “Flexible seating” in this section.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
LRS0556

JUMP SEAT (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not use a child restraint in the driver’s side jump seat. This seating position is not suitable for child restraint
installation. A child restraint can be installed in the passenger’s side jump
seat when the seat extension is unfolded from the seat base.
∙ When folding the jump seat, be careful
not to squeeze your finger between
the seat cushion and the body side.

LRS2901

ARMREST (if so equipped)
To use the center armrest on the rear
bench seat, pull on the tab in the center of
the seat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats when
they are in the fold-down position. In a
collision, people riding in these areas
without proper restraints are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.

– Be careful not to allow hands or
feet to get caught or pinched in the
seat.
∙ Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace
and adjust them properly if they have
been removed for any reason.
∙ If the head restraints/headrests are
removed for any reason, they should
be securely stored to prevent them
from causing injury to passengers or
damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
LRS2475

Folding the rear bench seat up (if
so equipped)
To fold the rear bench seat up:
1. Lift up on the lever, located on the side
of the seat, while lifting the front of the
seat cushion up.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2476

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion
toward the back of the vehicle until it
locks in place.

WARNING
∙ When the vehicle is being used to
carry cargo, properly secure all cargo
to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.

LRS2477

3. Repeat this process to raise and secure
the seat cushion on the other side of
the vehicle for maximum storage capacity.
To return the rear bench seat to a seating
position, reverse the process. Make sure to
properly push the seat cushion down
into place.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Never ride
in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place and latched.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2478

Child restraint anchor points

Folding the rear bench seat down
(if so equipped)
The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to access the child restraint anchor
point locations or the jacking equipment.
To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap
1 and tilt the seatback. The child reup 䊊
straint anchor points can be accessed behind the rear bench seatback. The jacking
equipment can be accessed from behind
the passenger’s side seatback.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or
death in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end collisions.
Adjustable
head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest
stalks
or
remove
the
head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2361

Crew Cab

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The
non-adjustable
head
restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat
frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
LRS2362

King Cab®
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped
with
head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position
equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).

– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.

LRS2300

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

LRS2299

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest

LRS2302

REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:

2. Single notch

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.

3. Lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

4. Stalks

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2303

INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
1 must be
with the notch (notches) 䊊
installed in the hole with the lock knob
2 .
䊊

WRS0134

LRS2351

ADJUST

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly
adjust
the
head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

LRS2305

LRS2306

Raise

Lower

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.

SPA1025

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Always adjust the head restraints
properly as specified in this section.
Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.
∙ Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELTS

∙ Do not attach anything to the head
restraint stalks. Doing so could impair
active head restraint function.
The active head restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint
helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it
is said that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision,
the head restraints return to their original
positions.
Properly adjust the active head restraints
as described in this section.

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

SSS0134

WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

LRS0786

NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

INJURED PERSONS

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.

NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.

NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.

∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.

WRS0175

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

Fastening the seat belts (front
seats all models and rear seats
Crew Cab models)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

LRS2897

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

LRS2674

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move, and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.

LRS2675

3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
C .
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

LRS0556

Fastening the seat belts ( jump
seats for King Cab® models)
1. Open the jump seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

LRS2723

LRS2724

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
A until you hear and feel the
buckle 䊊
latch engage.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and
B as shown.
snug on the hips 䊊

∙ The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
C .
the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The jump seat position’s three-point seat
belts have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the passengers
some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain
impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
1 . The seat belt automation the buckle 䊊
cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:

WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service or to learn more about seat belt
operation.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
1
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
2 , so the belt passes over
desired position 䊊
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING
∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.

∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraint
∙ Forward-facing child restraint
∙ Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat if available (Crew Cab models). Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN
recommends that infants be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose
a child restraint that fits your vehicle and
always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouching?
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?

LRS2690

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

CHILD RESTRAINTS
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
ARS1098

WRS0256

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Do not install rear-facing child restraints in the driver’s side rear
seating position.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– For forward-facing child seats and
boosters, DO NOT install if the child
restraint base extends past the
forward edge of the seat cushion.
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat (King Cab®
models).
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
anchors or the seat belt to install the
child restraint (not both at the same
time).
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2962

LATCH system lower anchor locations
(Crew Cab models)

LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs., (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
LRS2963

LATCH system lower anchor locations
(King Cab® models)
cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear
outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH lower anchors.

– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.

– Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed
using
the
damaged
anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.

– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

LRS0748

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS2984

LATCH label locations (Crew Cab models)

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
(Crew Cab models) to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.

Top tether anchor
WARNING
∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure the
cargo so it does not contact the top
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly
secured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage it during a
collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top
tether strap is damaged.
LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.

LRS0572

Front passenger seat (King Cab® models)
1. Top tether strap
2. Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
locations:
∙ On the back of the front passenger seat
(King Cab® models) as shown.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew
Cab models)
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.

LRS0393

Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)
∙ Under the rear window behind the rear
bench seat (Crew Cab models) as
shown.

LRS2101

Jump seats
(King Cab® models - passenger side
shown)
1. Cover plate
2. Routing bracket
3. Anchor point

∙ On the floor between the jump seat belt
buckles in the center of the vehicle (King
Cab® models) as shown.
The anchor point is located on the floor
between the jump seat belt buckles in the
center of the vehicle. The routing bracket is
located behind the cover plate under the
rear window above the jump seat.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seats using the
LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 2 through 4.

LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2357

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH —
JUMP SEAT (King Cab® models)
WARNING
∙ If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.
– Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the driver’s side
jump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.

– The front seat cannot be used
when a rear-facing child restraint
is installed on the jump seat. Attempting to do so could cause serious injury in a sudden stop or
collision.

LRS2356

WARNING
∙ To install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger’s side jump seat, it
will be necessary to move the front
passenger’s seat fully forward and
place the front seatback upright or tilt
it forward. Failure to do so may cause
the child restraint to not be installed
properly and cause serious injury or
death in a sudden stop or collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1. To access the jump seat extension
A on the jump
(passenger’s side only) 䊊
B on the extension to unseat, pull up 䊊
fold it to the open position. Then unfold
C and lower the
the two support legs 䊊
jump seat to the full open seating position.

LRS2725

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a child restraint on the jump seat.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2502

Full open seating position

LRS2552

Rear-facing — step 2
2. Move the front passenger’s seat into
the full forward position. Then move
the front seatback to the upright or
tilted forward position. Position the
child restraint on the jump seat. The
direction of the child restraint depends
on the type of the child restraint and
the size of the child. Always follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0801

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 4
4. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 4

3. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS (Crew Cab models)
WARNING
LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 5
5. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

LRS0669

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0670

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

WRS0763

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

LRS0597

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS — JUMP SEAT (King Cab®
models)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

WARNING

– The front seat cannot be used
when a rear-facing child restraint
is installed on the jump seat. Attempting to do so could cause serious injury in a sudden stop or
collision.

∙ The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip
over or be loose and cause injury to a
child in a sudden stop or collision.
Also, it can change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this
section.
∙ A child restraint system will not be installed properly and the child could be
seriously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.
– Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the driver’s side
jump seat.
– Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.

LRS0549

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a child restraint on the passenger’s side jump seat.
A
1. To access the jump seat extension 䊊
on the passenger’s side jump seat, pull
B on the extension to unfold it to
up 䊊
the open position. Then unfold the two
C and lower the jump
support legs 䊊
seat to the full open seating position.

LRS2725

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.

LRS2502

Full open seating position

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

LRS2552

LRS2726

Rear-facing — step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
A .
engage 䊊
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2727

Rear-facing — step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
B . At this time, the seat
fully extended 䊊
belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child
restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2728

Rear-facing — step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
C to remove any
the shoulder belt 䊊
slack in the belt.

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.

WRS0918

Rear-facing — step 7
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the seat
near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than
1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to
tug it forward and check to see if the
seat belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the rear seats using
the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH (Crew Cab models)
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0799

Forward-facing

webbing-mounted –
step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.

ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 3 through 6.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0392

Anchor point access
1.

Pull strap

Anchor points

Installing top tether strap (rear
bench seat for Crew Cab models)
To access the anchor points behind the
rear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback forward by lifting up on the pull strap behind
the seatback.

restraint is removed. For additional information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Return the seatback to the locked position.
5. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether
strap.
LRS0576

Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)
1.

Top tether strap

Tether strap

Tether anchor point

Before securing the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seating positions for Crew Cab models) follow
these steps.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
restraint/headrest to position the top
tether strap as shown. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

LRS2360

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH — JUMP SEAT (King Cab®
models)
WARNING
∙ If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

– Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.
– For forward-facing child seats and
boosters, DO NOT install if the child
restraint base extends past the
forward edge of the driver’s side
seat cushion.

LRS2725

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a child restraint on the jump seat.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2502

Full open seating position
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WRS0799

Forward-facing

webbing-mounted –
step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating po-

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3
sitions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
4. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 5
5. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 7
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.

Installing top tether strap — jump
seat (King Cab® models)

8. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 7.

WARNING
∙ Do not secure the top tether strap to
the routing bracket. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the
risk of a child being injured or killed in
a collision or a sudden stop greatly
increases.

LRS0561

Jump seat (King Cab® models)
1. Top tether strap
2. Routing bracket
3. Tether anchor point

∙ Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear seating positions).

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top
tether strap routing bracket for the
jump seat.
2. Route the top tether strap through the
routing bracket.
3. Secure the top tether strap to the
tether anchor point as shown.
4. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether
strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT
PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH
SEAT (Crew Cab models)
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.

WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats (Crew Cab models) or
in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 8.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the seat belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the seat belt as necessary, or
put the restraint in another seat and
test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WRS0475

Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to "Front passenger air
bag and status light" in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS0392

LRS0576

Anchor point access

Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)

Pull strap

Top tether strap

Anchor points

Tether strap

Tether anchor point

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
restraint/headrest to position the top
tether strap as shown. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint/headrest when the child
restraint is removed. For additional information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

WARNING

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Return the seatback to the locked position.
5. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether
strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

LRS0598

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT
PASSENGER AND JUMP SEATS
(King Cab® models)

∙ The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip
over or be loose and cause injury to a
child in a sudden stop or collision.
Also, it can change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this
section.
∙ If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.
– Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.
– For forward-facing child seats and
boosters, DO NOT install if the child
restraint system base extends
past the forward edge of the driver’s side seat cushion.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WRS0699

LRS2725

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) —
step 1
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.

Forward-facing ( jump seat for King Cab®
models) — step 2
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the jump seats (King Cab® models)
or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2502

Full open seating position
2. To access the jump seat extension
A on the jump
(passenger’s side only) 䊊
B on the extension to
seat, pull up 䊊
unfold it to the open position. Then unC and lower
fold the two support legs 䊊
the jump seat to the full open seating
position.

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

WRS0919

Forward-facing — step 3
3. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

WRS0680

Forward-facing — step 4
4. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.

LRS0667

Forward-facing — step 5
5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0668

Forward-facing — step 6
6. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.

10. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 3 through 9.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 7
7. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
8. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0698

Forward-facing — step 9
9. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the seat
near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than
1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to
tug it forward and check to see if the
belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt
as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

Installing top tether strap — front
passenger seat (King Cab®
models)
WARNING

WRS0475

Forward-facing — step 11
11. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front passhould
senger air bag status light
illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section. Move the
child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS0572

Front passenger seat (King Cab® models)
1.

Top tether strap

Anchor point

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head
restraint/headrest to position the top
tether straps over the top of the seatback. If the head restraint/headrest is
removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure
to
reinstall
the
head

Installing top tether strap — jump
seat (King Cab® models)

restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information,
refer
to
“Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

WARNING

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

∙ Do not secure the top tether strap to
the routing bracket. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the
risk of a child being injured or killed in
a collision or a sudden stop greatly
increases.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

LRS0561

Jump seat (King Cab® models)
1. Top tether strap
2. Routing bracket
3. Tether anchor point

∙ Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top
tether strap routing bracket for the
jump seat.

Precautions on booster seats

2. Route the top tether strap through the
routing bracket.

If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

3. Secure the top tether strap to the
tether anchor point as shown.
4. Refer back to child restraint installation
steps before tightening the tether
strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

WARNING

– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2479

Low back booster seat

High back booster seat

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

LRS0453

LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation — front
passenger seat (all models) and
rear seat (Crew Cab models)
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:

WRS0699

LRS0454

1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seat installation — jump
seat (King Cab® models)

If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.

WARNING
∙ If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden
stop or collision.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.

– For boosters, DO NOT install if the
child restraint system base extends past the forward edge of the
seat cushion.
WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pasmay or
senger air bag status light
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

– Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump
seat without unfolding the seat
extender.
∙ To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the jump seats:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

LRS2725

LRS2502

LRS0539

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to “Head
restraint/headrest” in this section.

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front
seat-mounted
supplemental air bag

side-impact

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact or rollover collisions. In a sideimpact, the curtain air bags are designed
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags
are designed to inflate and remain inflated
for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the seat belts
and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away
from the steering wheel, instrument panel
and door finishers. For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031

WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the

1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.

ARS1133

ARS1041

WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

ARS1042

WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-76 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

WRS0431

WRS0256

WARNING
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

Do not lean against the door.

WARNING
Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77

WARNING

LRS0396

SSS0162

Do not lean against doors or windows.

1-78 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails.
Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window
or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions
are
shown
in
the
previous
illustrations.

LRS0421

SSS0159

WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions
are
shown
in
the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
2. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
3. Front
seat-mounted
side-impact
supplemental air bag module
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags
5. Seat belt buckle switches
6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
7. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
8. Crash zone sensor
9. Occupant classification system control
unit
10. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor)
11. Satellite sensors

LRS2861

1-80 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. However, all of the information,
cautions and warnings in this manual
still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision
and seat belt usage for the driver. For the
front passenger, it additionally monitors
the weight of an occupant or object on the
seat and seat belt tension. Based on infor-

mation from the sensors, only one front air
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be
automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected
on the front passenger seat and how the
seat belt is used. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section.
One front air bag inflating does not indicate
improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information
about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81

After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

Status light
The front passenger air bag status
is located near the climate conlight
trols. After the ignition switch is placed in
the "ON" position, the front passenger air
bag status light on the instrument panel
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off or remains illuminated depending
on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.

1-82 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:
light is OFF and the front pasThe
senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate
in a crash.
∙ Front passenger’s seat occupied by a
small adult, child or child restraint as
light
outlined in this section: The
illuminates to indicate that the front
passenger air bag is OFF and will not
inflate in a crash.
∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the
passenger meet the conditions outlight is
lined in this section: The
OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF
it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.

the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor operation can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors.

The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are
designed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat
belt, such as when it is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). Based on the weight on the
seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected
on the seat belt, the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System determines whether the front
passenger air bag should be automatically
turned OFF as required by the regulations.

One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the
bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant
and objects on the seat by weight. It works
together with seat belt sensors described
in this section. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause

Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on
an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being
out of position), this could cause the sensor
to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the
occupant improperly uses the seat belt in
the ALR mode, this could cause the air bag
to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be

seated and wearing the seat belt properly
for the most effective protection by the
seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to
turn the front passenger air bag OFF for
specified child restraints as required by the
regulations. Failing to properly secure child
restraints and to use the ALR mode may
allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash
instead of being OFF. For additional information, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-83

seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF
with the seat occupied. The light will not
illuminate when the front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,
the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is not illuminated, reposition
the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, the
system may be sensing an unoccupied
seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A
NISSAN dealer can check that the system is
OFF by using a special tool. However, until
you have confirmed with a dealer that your
air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light will go from OFF
to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF.
This is normal system operation and does
not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air
, located in the mebag warning light
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It

1-84 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (pressure
sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.

When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-85

sion are similar to those of a higher severity
impact. They are designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted. They
may not inflate in certain side collisions.

air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and
curtain air bags do not provide restraint to
the lower body.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.

The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side
air bag. Rear seat passengers should be
seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag
and curtain air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
LRS2501

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of colli-

When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in
the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side

1-86 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The curtain air bags will remain inflated for
a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.

WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag. It
is also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-87

∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the pretensioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
is used to indicate malfunctions
light
in the pretensioner system. For additional
information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning
light indicates there is a malfunction, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.

1-88 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0885

1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-89

Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These
systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

1-90 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper air
bag deployment resulting in injury or
death.

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-91

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine oil pressure gauge (if so
equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Compass and outside temperature display
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-25
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Rear window or outside mirror defroster
switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-35
Hill descent control switch (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-36
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . 2-39
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Rear-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Under-seat storage bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Manual windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
HomeLink® universal transceiver
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-58
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
LII2484

2-2 Instruments and controls

Vents (P. 4-17)
Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P. 4-71)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-78, 4-90)
Driver supplemental air bag
(P. 1-73)
Horn (P. 2-33)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-14)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-22)
Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)
Storage (P. 2-40)
Audio system (P. 4-32)
Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-73)
Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)
Passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-73)
USB connection port (P. 4-58)
AUX input (P. 4-58)
Power outlets (P. 2-39)

METERS AND GAUGES
15.

16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.

LIC3327

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Warning and indicator lights
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Change/reset button
Voltmeter (if so equipped)

8.
9.

Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer (if so equipped)
Instrument brightness control knob
Engine oil pressure gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the trip
computer.

LIC0780

LIC3629

Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle is driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

2-4 Instruments and controls

With twin trip odometer
Changing the display
For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer, pressing the change/reset button
changes the display as follows:
Trip

→ Trip

WIC0922

With trip computer
For vehicles equipped with trip computer,
pressing
the
change/reset
button
changes the display as follows:
→ Trip
→ Distance to Empty
Trip
→ Average speed → Average fuel consumption → Journey time → Trip
For additional information, refer to “Trip
computer” in this section.
Resetting the trip odometer
Pressing the change/reset button for
more than 1 second resets the currently
displayed trip odometer to zero.

LIC3741

Loose fuel cap warning message
A for more
Press the change/reset button 䊊
than 1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after the fuel cap has
been tightened. For additional information,
refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.

LIC3742

Check tire pressure warning
message
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed when the low tire
pressure warning light is illuminated and
low tire pressure is detected. Check and
adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. The
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message turns off when the low tire pressure
warning light turns off.

Instruments and controls 2-5

The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section, and “Wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.
LIC0738

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
1 .
Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC0739

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant tempera1 when
ture is within the normal range 䊊
the gauge needle points within the zone
shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies
with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

indicates that the fuel-filler
The
door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
For additional information, refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual
for immediate action required.

CAUTION

LIC0740

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
light
After a few driving trips. the
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).

Instruments and controls 2-7

CAUTION
∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

LIC0741

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if
so equipped)
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication
system oil pressure while the engine is running. The needle should be in the middle of
the gauge when the engine is running.

2-8 Instruments and controls

∙ If the gauge needle does not move
with the proper amount of engine oil,
have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could
cause serious damage to the engine.

WIC1299

VOLTMETER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it
indicates the generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop
below the normal range. If the needle is not
1 while
in the normal range (11 - 15 volts) 䊊
the engine is running, it may indicate that
the charging system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can
be selected by pressing the change/reset
button. The following modes can be selected:

Distance To Empty (DTE—mile or
km)

LIC3743

The DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The DTE is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel
in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The display of the trip computer is situated
in the speedometer display. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the
display scrolls all the modes of the trip
computer and then shows the mode chosen before the ignition switch was placed
in the OFF position.

The DTE mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the
DTE mode is automatically selected and
the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s
attention. Press the change/reset button if
you wish to return to the mode that was
selected before the warning occurred. The
DTE mark will remain blinking until the vehicle is refueled.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the
DTE display will change to (----).

NOTE:
∙ If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is off is small, the display
just before the ignition switch is turned
off may continue to be displayed.
∙ When driving uphill or rounding
curves, the fuel in the tank shifts,
which may momentarily change the
display.

Average fuel consumption (Mpg
or l/100km)
The average fuel consumption mode
shows the average fuel consumption since
the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing
the change/reset button for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first
1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change/reset
button for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the
display shows (----).

Instruments and controls 2-9

COMPASS AND OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if so
equipped)
Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time
since the last reset. The displayed time can
be reset by pressing the change/reset button for more than approximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset
Pressing the change/reset button for
more than 3 seconds will reset all modes
except Trip A and distance to empty.

This unit has the following functions:
∙ Measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates heading direction of vehicle
∙ Indicates outside air temperature
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
or
button as depress the
scribed in the charts below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare
rearview mirror.
Type A (if so equipped)
Press and hold
the
button for
about:
1 second
8 seconds
11 seconds
13 seconds

2-10 Instruments and controls

Feature:
(Press button again for about
1 second to change settings)
Compass toggles on/off
Automatic anti-glare/indicator
light toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
to correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration
mode

Type B (if so equipped)
Press and hold
the
button for
about:
1 second
8 seconds
10 seconds

Feature:
(Press button again for about
1 second to change settings)
Compass toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed
to correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration
mode

For additional information, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

∙ The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind direction and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the
actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or
billboards.

COMPASS

WIC0904

Type A (if so equipped)

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Push the
or
button for about
1 second when the ignition key is in the ON
position to toggle the outside temperature
1 on or off.
and compass direction display 䊊
∙ To change from °F to °C, push and hold
button for about 5 seconds or
the
button for about 3 seconds
the
until the display begins to flash. Press
the button again to toggle between °C
and °F.

LIC0583

Type B (if so equipped)
∙ When the outside temperature is between 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the
display will read 140°F (60°C). When the
temperature is above 194°F (90°C), the
display will read “SC”.
∙ When the outside temperature is between than -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F
(-51°C), the display will read -40°F (-40°C).
When the temperature is below -60°F
(-51°C), the display will read “OC”.

Push the
or
button for about
1 second when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position to toggle the outside
temperature and compass direction dis1 on or off. The display will indicate
play 䊊
the direction that the vehicle is heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route.
The compass will be calibrated once it has
tracked three complete circles.

Instruments and controls 2-11

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause false
compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular
location if this happens:
button for
1. Press and hold the
about 8 seconds. The current zone
number will appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone
map. Refer to the illustration.
button repeatedly to
3. Press the
toggle through the zone numbers until
the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone
number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0355

2-12 Instruments and controls

Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct
direction is not shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and
hold the
for about 10 seconds.
The “C” icon in the compass display will
illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the
vehicle in three complete circles at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the
operation of the compass.
∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it
may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-13

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
4WD warning light (

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

Seat belt warning light and chime

Hill descent control system ON indicator
light (if so equipped)

Automatic transmission oil temperature
warning light (if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning
model)
light (

4WD shift indicator light
model)
(

Overdrive OFF indicator light
(if so equipped)

Automatic transmission position
indicator light (if so equipped)

Security indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light

Cruise main switch indicator light

Slip indicator light

Door open warning light

Cruise set switch indicator light

Transfer 4LO position indicator light
model)
(

Engine oil pressure warning light

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

model)

Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light

Brake warning light

Low tire pressure warning light

2-14 Instruments and controls

CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
,
or
,
,
,
The following lights (if so equipped) come
on briefly and then go off:
or

,
,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS
This vehicle has various warning lights that
may illuminate to indicate a potential problem. For additional information, refer to the
specific light in this section.

4WD warning light (
model)
The 4WD warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
It turns off soon after the engine is started.

– in the 4LO position for automatic
transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the brake
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning
properly, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. For additional information, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive
(4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.

– in the 4LO position for manual
transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the clutch
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD,

CAUTION
∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks
during operation, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD
warning light turns on when you are
driving on dry hard surface roads:
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.

Instruments and controls 2-15

If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

Automatic transmission oil
temperature warning light
(if so equipped)
This light comes on when the automatic
transmission oil temperature is too high. If
the light comes on while driving, reduce the
vehicle speed as soon as safely possible
until the light turns off.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation when the
A/T oil temperature warning light is on
may
damage
the
automatic
transmission.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Automatic transmission
park warning light (
model)
WARNING
∙ If the ATP light is ON, this indicates
that the automatic transmission P
(Park) position will not function and
the transfer case is in neutral.
∙ When parking, always make sure that
the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set.
Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in
the vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or
property damage.
∙ Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H
or 4LO position again to turn off the
ATP warning light when the shift lever
is in the P position and the ATP warning light is ON. (Before shifting the
4WD switch into the 4LO position,
move the shift lever into the N position once, shift the shift lever into P
again and make sure the ATP warning
light is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic
transmission parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured
in any drive position while the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position, the transmission will
disengage and the drive wheels will not
lock.

Brake warning
light

This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running, with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because
driving
it
could
be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure
warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
it is safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.

2-18 Instruments and controls

The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.

Low tire pressure warning

The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)
warning message is also displayed in the
odometer.

For additional information, refer to “Check
tire pressure warning message” in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
and in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.

TPMS malfunction

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not
appear if the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Low windshield-washer
fluid warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshieldwasher fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position and remains illuminated
until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime sounds for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for
the front passenger.

2-20 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
This vehicle has various indicator lights
that may illuminate to indicate a system
status. For additional information, refer to
the specific light in this section.

4WD shift indicator light
(
model)
The light should turn off within 1 second
after placing the ignition switch in the ON
position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift
indicator light will illuminate the position
selected by the 4WD shift switch.
The 4WD shift indicator light may blink
while shifting from one drive mode to
the other.

Automatic transmission
position indicator light (if
so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch
indicator light
The light comes on when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The light goes out
when the main switch is pushed again.
When the cruise main switch indicator light
comes on, the cruise control system is operational. For additional information, refer
to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise set switch indicator
light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the cruise control system. If
the light blinks while the engine is running,
it may indicate the cruise control system is
not functioning properly. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Electronic locking rear
differential (E-Lock) system
ON indicator light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the electronic
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
clutch is fully engaged.
The indicator light flashes when the system is first turned on. When the system fully
engages, the light remains on. If the switch
is on and the indicator light continues to
flash, the system is not engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” in this section and “Electronic
locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.

Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status
will be lit and the passenger front
light
air bag will be off depending on how the
front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system
ON indicator light (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on briefly and
then turns off.
The light comes on when the hill descent
control system is activated.

Instruments and controls 2-21

If the hill descent control switch is on and
the indicator light blinks, the system is not
engaged.
If the indicator light does not come on
when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to “Hill descent control switch” in this section and “Hill
descent control system” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.

2-22 Instruments and controls

light
After a few driving trips, the
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
light does
few driving trips. If the
not turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.

Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)

You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.

The indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other.

This light comes on when the overdrive
function is OFF.

The light will blink for a few seconds after
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The automatic transmission overdrive
function is controlled by the overdrive
switch.

indicator light also comes on
The
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after approximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking
and remain illuminated or turn off before
shifting the transmission into gear. If the
shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)
position to any other gear when the 4LO
indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may
move unexpectedly.

For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light (if
so equipped)
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This function indicates the security systems
equipped on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to
the fact that the road surface is slippery
and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

Transfer 4LO position
indicator light (
model)
This light comes on when the 4WD shift
switch is set in the 4LO position with the
ignition switch in the ON position.
The transfer case may be damaged if you
shift the switch while driving.
Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD
shift switch to 4LO.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow
the instructions below:
∙ For automatic transmission models,
stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position with the
brake pedal depressed, then depress
and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or
4H.
∙ For manual transmission models, stop
the vehicle and shift the shift lever to
the N (Neutral) position with the clutch
pedal depressed, then depress and turn
the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.
You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift
switch between 4H and 4LO unless you
stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to
the N position with the brake pedal (A/T
models) or clutch pedal (M/T models) depressed.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF position, the transfer case is in the 4LO position
model), or when the VDC system
(
is not functioning properly. This indicates
the VDC system is not operating.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine and the system will operate normally.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The VDC light also comes on when you turn
the ignition key to the ON position. The light
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the
system is operational. If the light stays on
)
or comes on along with the SLIP (
indicator light while you are driving, have
the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

2-24 Instruments and controls

If the battery is removed or discharged, the
VDC system is disabled and the VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. To reset the system, you must
perform the reset procedure. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
If the light does not go off after performing
the reset procedure, have the traction control system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
The VDC system will be disabled and the
VDC light will illuminate when the electronic locking rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so equipped) is turned on
and the E-lock system is engaged. If the
E-lock system disengages or the switch is
turned off, the VDC system will be enabled
and the VDC light will turn off.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
opened while the key is left in the ignition
switch. Remove the key and take it with you
when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
detection-type system that activates
when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the ignition, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
LIC3766

Your vehicle may have two types of security
systems:
∙ Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if
so equipped)

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The
doors can be locked with the key,
power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked and then closed), or
with the key fob.
Key fob operation:
button on the key
∙ Press the
fob. All doors lock. The hazard lights
flash twice and the horn beeps once
to indicate all doors are locked.
button is pressed
∙ When the
with all doors locked, the hazard
lights flash twice and the horn beeps
once as a reminder that the doors
are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. For
additional information, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
indicator light
4. Confirm that the
comes on. The
light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security
system is now pre-armed. After about
30 seconds the vehicle security system
automatically shifts into the armed
light begins to flash
phase. The
once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-

Instruments and controls 2-25

second pre-arm time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by the key or the
key fob, or the ignition switch is placed
in ACC or ON position, the system will
not arm.
∙ If the key is turned slowly when locking the driver’s door, the system may
not arm. Furthermore, if the key is
turned beyond the vertical position
toward the unlock position the system may be disarmed when the key is
removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for a period of time, unlock the
door once and lock it again.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off after
a period of time. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again. The alarm can be shut off by
unlocking the driver’s door with the key
button on the
or by pressing the
key fob.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ Opening a door without using the key or
key fob (even if the door is unlocked by
using the inside lock knob or the power
door lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

∙ Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position.

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s door with the key or by pressing
button on the key fob.
the

Vehicle security system activation

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.

The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
∙ The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.

2-26 Instruments and controls

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

NOTE:

If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as
soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LIC0474

Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position with the key
removed from the ignition switch.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

Instruments and controls 2-27

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW OR OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped)
4 to have one sweep
Push the lever up 䊊
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
LIC1419

LIC3775

SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the
A (Slower) or 䊊
B (Faster)
knob toward 䊊
Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

2-28 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

Type A (if so equipped)
To defrost the rear window glass (if so
equipped), place the ignition switch in the
ON or START position and push the rear
window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch
comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
To defrost the outside mirrors (if so
equipped), place the ignition switch in the
ON or START position and push the outside
mirror defroster switch on. The outside
mirror defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to
turn the defroster off.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC3279

Type B (if so equipped)
The rear window/outside mirror defroster
(if so equipped) automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

WIC1424

Type A (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊

2
䊊

position,
Rotate the switch to the
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.

WIC1452

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.

Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-29

To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
1 .
position 䊊
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off
and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain on for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
WIC1426

Type C (if so equipped)

LIC0561

Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you turn the key to the OFF position and all doors are closed.

2-30 Instruments and controls

To turn the autolight system off, turn the
, or
posiswitch to the OFF,
tion.

3
䊊

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams need not be engaged
for this function.

Battery saver system

LIC0835

Be sure you do not put anything on top
1 located in the
of the autolight sensor 䊊
top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
if it is dark out and the headlights will
illuminate. If this occurs while parked
with the engine off and the switch in the
ON position, your vehicle’s battery could
become discharged.

LIC0562

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

2
䊊

To select the high beam function, ensure the low beams are engaged and
push the lever forward. The high beam
light illulights come on and the
minates. For additional information, refer to “Headlight control switch” in this
section.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is in
or
position, the headlights
the
will turn off after a period of time.
After the headlights automatically turn off
with the headlight switch in the
or
position, the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved
to the OFF position and then turned to
or
position.
the

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.

Pull the lever back to return to the low
beams.

Instruments and controls 2-31

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The DRL automatically illuminate when the
engine is started with the parking brake
released. The DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in
position. Turn the headlight
the
switch to the
position for full illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.
The DRL illuminate when the parking brake
is released. The DRL will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.

2-32 Instruments and controls

WIC0917

LIC0563

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in
or
the AUTO (if so equipped),
position.
A to adjust the brightness
Turn the control 䊊
of the instrument panel lights when driving
at night.

1
䊊

Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
complete.

HORN
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are selected.

LIC0393

WIC1449

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)

To sound the horn, push the area between
the horn icons on the steering wheel.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped),
the headlights must be on, then turn the
position.
fog light switch to the
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.

WARNING

Instruments and controls 2-33

CARGO LAMP SWITCH

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
LIC0616

To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch
down to the ON position.

CAUTION
Be sure to turn the light switch to the
OFF position when you leave the vehicle
for extended periods of time, otherwise
the battery will go dead.

LIC3762

The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON or
START position.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch
will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

2-34 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
∙ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC3344

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
indicator will come
OFF switch. The
on.

Instruments and controls 2-35

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
∙ The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under
all load or road conditions. Always be
prepared to depress the brake pedal
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.

CAUTION

LIC0743

WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle
speed when driving on steep downhill
grades. Always drive carefully when
using the hill descent control system
and decelerate the vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely
steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss
of control of the vehicle and possible
serious injury or death.

2-36 Instruments and controls

When the hill descent control system
operates continuously for a long time,
the temperature of the brake pads may
increase and the hill descent control
system may be temporarily disabled
(the indicator light will blink). If the indicator light does not come on continuously after blinking, stop using the
system.
The hill descent control system is designed
to reduce driver workload when going
down steep hills. The hill descent control
system helps to control vehicle speed so
the driver can concentrate on steering the
vehicle.
To activate the hill descent control system:
∙ The shift lever must be in forward or
reverse gear,

∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4L position and the vehicle speed must be under 15 mph (25 km/h) or
∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4H position and the vehicle speed must be under 21 mph (35 km/h), and
∙ The hill descent control system switch
must be ON.
The hill descent control system ON indicator light will come on when the system is
activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent control system
applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating
temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or
brake pedal is released, the hill descent
control system begins to function again if
the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
The hill descent control system ON indicator light blinks if the switch is on and all
conditions for system activation are not
met or if the system becomes disengaged
for any reason.
To turn off the hill descent control system,
push the switch to the OFF position.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM
SWITCH (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Hill descent control system ON indicator light” in
this section and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual.

When the E-Lock switch is turned on, the
indicator light will flash until the system
engages. However, if all operation conditions listed above are not met or the system becomes disengaged, the indicator
light will continue to flash.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when
the E-Lock system is on. Also, the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled
and the VDC light illuminates when the
E-Lock system is on.
LIC0729

The E-Lock system can help provide added
traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming
stuck.

For additional information, refer to “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of
this manual for further explanation and
system limitations.

To activate the E-Lock system:
∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles),
∙ The vehicle must be stopped or moving
at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and
∙ The E-Lock system switch must be
turned on.

WARNING
∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on
when driving on paved or hardsurfaced roads. Turning the vehicle
may result in the rear wheels slipping
and result in an accident and personal
injury. After using the E-lock system
to free the vehicle, turn the system off.

Instruments and controls 2-37

CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start)
SWITCH (if so equipped)
To use the clutch interlock switch:

∙ Use the E-Lock system only when
freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position before using the E-Lock system.
Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice
surface. Using the E-Lock system
when driving in these road conditions
may cause unexpected movement of
the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury.

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Depress the brake pedal with your right
foot.
3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal
and release the parking brake.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
5. Push and release the clutch interlock
switch. The CANCEL light on the switch
will illuminate.

CAUTION
∙ After using the E-lock system, turn
the switch off to prevent possible
damage to driveline components
from extended use.
∙ Do not drive over 12 mph (20 km/h)
when the system is engaged. Doing so
could result in possible damage to the
driveline.
∙ Do not turn on the E-lock system
while the tires are spinning. Doing so
could
damage
drivetrain
components.

2-38 Instruments and controls

WIC0817

WARNING
Pay special attention to your surroundings when using the clutch interlock
switch. The vehicle will move forward or
backward according to the gear
selected.
The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch
allows for starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. This feature
helps you restart the engine if it stops under difficult conditions. (For example, the
engine stops on a steep hill and a slight
movement forward or backward might be
dangerous.)

6. Turn the ignition to the START position
to start the engine and, at the same
time, depress the accelerator pedal
with your right foot. As the vehicle begins to move, take your left foot off the
brake. Once the engine has started, the
clutch interlock switch CANCEL light
shuts off. Do not use the interlock
switch to start the engine under normal driving conditions.

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(if so equipped)

POWER OUTLETS
The rear sonar system can be disabled by
pushing the OFF switch. When the system
is disabled, the indicator light on the switch
will illuminate.
The system will automatically reset the
next time the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
For additional information, refer to “Rear
sonar system (RSS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section in this manual.

LIC0471

WARNING
The rear sonar system is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and check that it is
safe to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is
active when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position and the shift lever is in R
(Reverse).

WIC1420

Front row
The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)
maximum.
The power outlets are powered only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Open the cap to use a power outlet.

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft
(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is
emitted.

Instruments and controls 2-39

STORAGE

∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
LIC0761

Center console

CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

2-40 Instruments and controls

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquids to contact the outlet.

WIC0824

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

LIC0826

Type A (if so equipped)

REAR-DOOR POCKETS

LIC0825

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC1328

SEATBACK POCKET (if so
equipped)
A seatback pocket may be located on the
back of the driver’s seat. The pocket may
be used to store maps.

Instruments and controls 2-41

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
∙ The cargo restrained in the underseat storage bins must not exceed the
weight limits listed below or the bins
may not stay secured. In a sudden
stop or collision, the unsecured bins
could cause personal injury.
King Cab® model: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)
Crew Cab model
Driver’s side: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)
Passenger’s side: 25 lbs. (11.33 kg)

LIC0821

Rear row under-seat storage bin
(King Cab® model)

2-42 Instruments and controls

LIC0820

Rear row under-seat storage bin
(Crew Cab model)

∙ If the under-seat storage bins are removed for any reason, they should be
securely stored to prevent them from
causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden
braking or an accident.

∙ Do not place sharp objects in the
under-seat storage bins. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury when the vehicle is
moving or if the vehicle is involved in a
collision.
To access the under-seat storage bins:
For King Cab® models, lift up the jump seat.
For additional information, refer to “Jump
seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
For Crew Cab models, lift up the rear bench
seat. For additional information, refer to
“Folding the rear bench seat down” in the
“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

LIC1539

LIC0822

To remove the under-seat storage bins:
1. Remove the storage net.
2. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position
2 .
䊊
3. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the
storage bin (King Cab® model).

Top center tray

STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.

To install the under-seat storage bins:
1. Position the under-seat storage bin so
the holes line up with the holes in the
floorboard.
2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the
1 .
LOCK position 䊊

Instruments and controls 2-43

LIC0818

A/T model

LIC3646

M/T model — Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3647

M/T model — Type B (if so equipped)

GLOVE BOX
To open the top portion of the glove box,
A up and raise the lid.
push the latch 䊊
To open the lower portion of the glove box,
B down and lower the lid.
pull the handle 䊊

WARNING
Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident
or a sudden stop.

2-44 Instruments and controls

LIC0768

CONSOLE BOX
1 to open the console
Pull up on the lever 䊊
2 .
box lid 䊊

LIC0766

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.

LIC3387

CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.

Instruments and controls 2-45

WARNING
∙ The cup holder should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid
is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.

CAUTION
WIC0827

Front

CUP HOLDERS
The front cup holders have adapters that
can be removed to accommodate larger
cups.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

WIC0771

Rear seat (rear of front console)
To open the rear row cup holders (rear of
the front console), lower the lid. To close,
raise the lid. If stepped on, the cup holder is
designed to snap loose from the console.
To re-install, close the cup holder assembly
and push it back into the console opening.
To fold the rear seat back, first close the cup
holder.

2-46 Instruments and controls

LIC0784

Front bottle holders

WIC0828

Rear bottle holders

CAUTION
∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any
other objects that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or
an accident.
∙ Do not use the bottle holder for open
liquid containers.

Instruments and controls 2-47

WARNING
∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle
is loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
roof rack.
∙ Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or abnormal handling maneuvers.
∙ Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack
load weight capacity.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
WIC0857

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

2-48 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing
items from the roof rack. If you cannot
comfortably lift the items onto the roof
rack from the ground, use a ladder or
stool.

WINDOWS
Always evenly distribute the cargo on the
tubular roof rack. The maximum total
load is 125 lbs. (56 kg) evenly distributed.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR
are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located
on the driver’s side door jamb pillar). For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
The front crossbar can be adjusted or removed. Use the TORX® driver provided in
the tool kit to loosen both crossbar adjusting screws.
To adjust:
1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the
1 by turning counterTORX® driver 䊊
A .
clockwise 䊊
2. When the clamp is loosened, move the
crossbar so the cargo can be posiB.
tioned on the crossbar 䊊
3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws
with the TORX® driver by turning clockwise.
4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the
crossbar adjusting screws.
To remove:
1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the
1 by turning counterTORX® driver 䊊
A .
clockwise 䊊

C .
2. Rotate the clamps 䊊

3. Remove the crossbar.
4. Reverse to install.
5. Always check the tightness of the
crossbar adjusting screws.
If you hear wind noise coming from the roof
rack while driving, adjust the roof rack
crossbar to the neutral position.

LIC3352

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so
equipped)
The side windows can be opened or closed
by turning the hand crank on each door.

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Driver’s side power window
switch

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the
windows is canceled.

The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close the front
and rear passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and
hold it down. To close a window, pull the
switch and hold it up. To stop the opening
or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

LIC1329

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

2-50 Instruments and controls

Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger side window
switch
Right rear passenger window
switch (Crew Cab models only)
Left rear passenger window switch
(Crew Cab models only)
Driver’s side automatic switch

WIC0260

LIC2663

Front passenger’s power window
switch

Rear power window switch (Crew
Cab models only)

The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open the window, push the switch
1 . To close the window,
and hold it down 䊊
2 .
pull the switch up 䊊

The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding passenger
window. To open the window, push the
1 . To close the
switch and hold it down 䊊
2 .
window, push the switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

LIC0410

Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window
switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.

Instruments and controls 2-51

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

∙ Do not place objects through the
opened rear window. Do not use the
rear window as a cargo area passthrough. This may result in damage to
the rear window system or personal
injury.
1 , then
Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊
2 .
slide the window open 䊊

LIC3488

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ You must ensure all occupants and
objects are free of the rear window
area prior to and during operation.
Failure to do so may result in injury
and/or damage to the rear window
system.
∙ The rear window is not designed to
carry long items through it.

WIC0882

POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. The
power moonroof is operational for about
45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is
turned to the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door
is opened during this period of about
45 seconds, power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, push the
1 .
switch toward DOWN/OPEN 䊊

2-52 Instruments and controls

To fully close the moonroof, push the
2 .
switch toward UP/CLOSE 䊊
To open or close the moonroof part way,
push the switch in any direction while the
moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired
position.

Tilting the moonroof
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch
2 . Release the switch,
toward UP/CLOSE 䊊
then push the UP/CLOSE switch again to
tilt the moonroof up.
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch
1 .
toward DOWN/OPEN 䊊

Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or
tilted down by automatic operation when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the
moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the
front, the moonroof will immediately open
backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the
moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down
switch within 5 seconds after it happens;
the moonroof will fully close gradually.
Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.

WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts and
child restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.

CAUTION
∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-53

INTERIOR LIGHTS

LIC0789

Type A (if so equipped)
The interior lights have a three-position
switch and operate regardless of ignition
switch position.
1 ,
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
in the ON position.

When the switch is in the O (DOOR) position
2 , the interior lights will stay on for a period
䊊
of time when:

LIC0792

Type B (if so equipped)
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a
key or the power door lock switch while
all doors are closed and the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is
activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key
fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.

2-54 Instruments and controls

LIC0630

Type C (if so equipped)
∙ The ignition switch is turned on.
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
3 ,
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most Radio Frequency devices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.

LIC0791

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
To turn the map lights on, press the lenses.
To turn them off, press the lenses of the
lights again.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all
programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the
programmed
HomeLink®
Universal
Transceiver buttons should be erased for
security purposes. For additional information,
refer
to
“Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A
garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing
garage door and then automatically
stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
or objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc., that you are programming.
∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

Instruments and controls 2-55

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

NOTE:

If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
in “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” in this
section.

NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
1 in view.
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

2-56 Instruments and controls

LIC2365

2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the
1 flashes
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing
indicates successful programming.)

4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If
there is difficulty locating the button,
reference the garage door opener’s
manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
LIC2366

3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
1
is
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button
is pressed and released.
1 blinks rapidly
∙ If the indicator light 䊊
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your
vehicle to perform the next steps.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence up
to three times to complete the training
process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
Step 2 with the following:

7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty
programming
your
HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
HomeLink®
web
site
at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515.

When programming a garage door
opener, etc., unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener components.

NOTE:

1. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
section.

Instruments and controls 2-57

2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. During training, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every
2 seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed
with
“Programming
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember
to plug it back in when programming is
completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate
the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.

2-58 Instruments and controls

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
If HomeLink® is not programmed within
that time, try holding the transmitter in
another position – keeping the indicator
light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer
to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button” in this section.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming
mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pressing
the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

NOTE:

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into
HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of
each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional information.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Instruments and controls 2-59

MEMO

2-60 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6
How to use remote keyless entry
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Tilt operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Truck box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Bed extender (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Tie down hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,
it can duplicated without knowing the key
number.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)
You can only drive your vehicle using the
master key which is registered to the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. This key has a transponder chip in the key head.
LPD0348

1. Two master keys with transponder chip
and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on
one side
2. Transponder chip
3. Key number plate
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep the
plate in a safe place (such as your wallet),
not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers
so it is very important to keep track of your
key number plate.

The master key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN
dealer can duplicate your existing key. As
many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System keys can be used with one vehicle.
You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the
NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase
the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

System. After the registration process,
these components will only recognize keys
coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System during registration. Any key that is
not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.

WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.
WPD0311

Driver’s side and Passenger’s side (if so
equipped)

LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.

Manual (if so equipped)
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
1 . To unlock, turn the key
of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
toward the rear 䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LPD0240

LPD0298

Driver’s side

Inside lock

Power (if so equipped)

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

To lock the door without the key, move the
1 ,
inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊
then close the door.

1 of the
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
vehicle locks all the doors.
2 of
Turning the key 1 time toward the rear 䊊
the vehicle unlocks that door. From that
3
position, returning the key to neutral 䊊
(where the key can only be removed and
inserted) and turning it toward the rear
again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
4 .
䊊

To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
2 .
䊊

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WPD0381

Driver’s and Passenger’s side

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or passenger’s
1 . When locking
side) to the lock position 䊊
the door this way, be certain not to leave
the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or passen2 .
ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s
side) is moved to the lock position with the
key in the ignition switch and any door
opens, all doors will lock and then unlock
automatically. This helps to prevent the
keys from being accidently locked inside
the vehicle.

LPD0278

REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)
1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

LPD0312

2. From the outside, pull the door handle
A toward you.
䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

WPD0313

3. Open the door to the desired position.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park)
position, when the ignition is turned to
the OFF position, or when the key is removed from the ignition.

WPD0037

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
(if so equipped)
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
key fob while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
the interior light on, and activate the panic
alarm by using the key fob from outside the
vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors.
The key fob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.

As many as five key fobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning
the purchase and use of additional key
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
∙ The battery is discharged.
∙ The distance between the vehicle and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when
the key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the key fob:
∙ Do not allow the key fob, which contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C)
∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the key fob near equipment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

LPD0209

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Close all windows.

∙ Do not drop the key fob.

2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.
∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.

button on the key fob.
4. Press the
All the doors lock. The hazard warning
lights flash twice and the horn beeps
once to indicate all doors are locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

∙ When the
button is pressed
with all doors locked, the hazard
warning lights flash twice and the
horn beeps once as a reminder that
the doors are already locked.

button on the key fob again
Press the
within 5 seconds.
∙ All doors unlock.
∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed.
The interior lights can be turned off without
waiting by inserting the key into the ignition
switch and placing the ignition switch in
the ON or START position, locking the doors
with the key fob or pushing the interior light
switch to the OFF position.

∙ If a door is open and you press
button, the doors will lock
the
but the horn will not beep and the
hazard lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep. For additional information, refer to “Silencing the
horn beep feature” in this section.

Auto relock
WPD0158

Unlocking doors
Press the

button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if
all doors are completely closed with the
ignition switch in any position except
the ON position.

∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch
and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

∙ The interior lights illuminate for a period
of time when the interior light switch is
in the normal operation position.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the
button on the key fob is
pressed, all doors will lock automatically
within 1 minute unless one of the following
operations is performed:

Opening automatic windows (if so
equipped)

Using the interior lights
Press the
button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
section in this manual.

The key fob allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation.
∙ To open the windows, press the
button on the key fob for longer than
3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
the
button on the key fob.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the key fob.
LPD2497

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
button on the key fob for longer
the
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

HOOD
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD0262

Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the key fob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0302
1
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
located below the driver’s side instrument panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
2 at the front of the
2. Push the lever 䊊
hood to the side as illustrated with your
fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Insert the support rod into the slot on
3 .
the underside of the hood 䊊
When closing the hood, return the hood rod
to its original position. Lower the hood approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch
and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

WARNING

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2698

FUEL-FILLER CAP

∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could
Malfunction Indialso cause the
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message will be displayed if the fuel-filler
cap is not properly tightened. It may
take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to
tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is displayed may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to
illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malproperly may cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
in the “Instruments and Controls” section in this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
Fuel recommendation (for VQ40DE
models):
∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. For additional information,
refer to “Fuel recommendation (for
VQ40DE models)” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation (if so equipped):
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on up to E-85 fuel.
Fuel system or other damage can occur if up to E-85 fuel is used in vehicles
that are not designed to run on E-85
fuel. For additional information, refer
to “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
Fuel recommendation
models):

(for

QR25DE

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation (for QR25DE models)” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation (for QR25DE models),”
“Fuel recommendation (for VQ40DE models)” or “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

3. Press the loose fuel cap change/reset
A in the meter for about one
button 䊊
second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning message after tightening the
fuel-filler cap.
For additional information, refer to “Meters
and gauges” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2699

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.

LRS2004

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
displays in the odometer when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened correctly after the
vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning message,
perform the following:

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
described above as soon as possible.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
1 while refueling.
䊊
To install the fuel-filler cap:

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

STEERING WHEEL

SUN VISORS

LPD0304

TILT OPERATION (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.
Pull the lock lever toward the driver and
hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or
down to the desired position.
Release the lock lever to lock the steering
wheel in place.

WPD0344

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS
1. To block glare from the front, swing
1 the main sun visor.
down 䊊
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the main sun visor from the center
mount and swing the visor to the side
2 .
䊊

3 the sun visor, slide in or
3. To extend 䊊
out as needed (if so equipped).

CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

WPD0307

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and
turn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0126

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 to reduce glare
Use the night position 䊊
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
at night.
2 when driving in
Use the day position 䊊
daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
1 is activated
automatic anti-glare sensor 䊊
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2 will illuminate when
The indicator light 䊊
the automatic anti-glare sensor feature is
operating.
LPD2505

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

Type A (if so equipped)
The indicator light will illuminate when the
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
button as described:
press the
∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
button. The indicator light will
the
turn off.
∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
button again. The indicator
the
light will turn on.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2504

Type B (if so equipped)
For information on HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver (if so equipped) operation, refer
to the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
For additional information about the com3 and compass features, refer to
pass 䊊
“Compass and outside temperature display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to
other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0170

LPD0237

Manual control type (if so
equipped)

Electric control type (if so
equipped)

The outside mirrors can be moved in any
direction for a better rear view.

The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
1 to select the right
Move the small switch 䊊
2 to
or left mirror. Move the large switch 䊊
adjust each mirror to the desired position.
1 to the center
Move the small switch 䊊
(neutral) position to prevent accidentally
moving the mirror.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

TRUCK BOX
For additional information on proper truck
box loading, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the folded position. Use of these
areas by passengers without proper
restraints could result in serious injury
or death in an accident or sudden
stop.
LPD0259

LPD0270

Foldable outside mirrors

TAILGATE

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.

Opening the tailgate

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to
“Rear window or outside mirror defroster
switch (if so equipped)” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower
the tailgate. The support cables hold the
tailgate open.
When closing the tailgate, make sure the
latches are securely locked.
Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate
down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s
Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent
in the extended position.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove
box and connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to avoid contamination
which will lead to malfunction of the
rear camera.
7. Remove the tailgate. For additional information, refer to “Removing the tailgate” in this section.

LPD2097

Disconnecting the rear camera (if
so equipped)
Before removing the tailgate disconnect
the rear camera by performing the following:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
1 located
camera connector bracket 䊊
on the rear sill.
2
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊
from the sill by pressing the locking tab
inward, in the direction shown, while
pulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness
3 by pressing inward on the locking
䊊
tab, in the direction shown, while pulling
the connectors apart. Hold the connector firmly to prevent the connector
in the chassis harness from falling into
the sill.
4. Take the chassis plug and bracket from
the glove box and connect them to the
chassis wiring harness to avoid contamination to the terminals which will
lead to malfunction of the rear camera.
5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle.
3. Pull the tailgate out from the right side
hinge.
4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side
hinge.

Installing the tailgate
1. Insert the tailgate into the left side
hinge.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle
and insert into the right side hinge.
LPD2208

Removing the tailgate
1. Release the tailgate support cables.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 15
degree angle and attach the tailgate
support cables.
4. Close the tailgate securely.

CAUTION
∙ The tailgate is heavy. Two people
should remove or install it. Be careful
not to drop it during removal.
∙ After releasing the support cables, do
not let the tailgate rest on the
bumper.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2097

Connecting the rear camera (if so
equipped)
Before closing the tailgate reconnect the
rear camera by performing the following:
1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the
truck, keep the tailgate open and check
that the tailgate harness is not hanging
below the tailgate.
2
2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊
from the sill by pressing the locking tab
inward, in the direction shown, while
pulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug and
bracket from the chassis wiring har3 . Keep the connector and
ness 䊊
bracket in a safe place such as the
glove box.

LPD0272

Locking the tailgate
To lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the
1 . To unlock,
passenger side of the vehicle 䊊
2 .
turn the key toward the driver side 䊊

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the
tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tailgate plug in a safe place such as the
glove box.
5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to
the chassis wiring harness.
6. Securely fix the rear camera connector
1 to the rear sill.
bracket 䊊
7. Close the tailgate securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

BED EXTENDER (if so equipped)
CAUTION
∙ Do not overload the bed extender.
Maximum load on the open tailgate is
200 lbs. (890N).
∙ Evenly distribute and properly secure
all cargo.
∙ Do not use the bed extender or tailgate to secure cargo.

LPD0480

Positioning the bed extender
To use the bed extender in the inward position perform the following:
1 toward the
1. Rotate the bed extender 䊊
cab of the truck.
2. If necessary, remove tethers from the
tailgate latch.
3. Tighten the knobs to secure the extender into the desired position.
4. Close the tailgate.
5. Place cargo inside the bed extender in
the truck bed.
6. Properly secure the cargo.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0479

To use the bed extender in the outward
position perform the following:
1. Open the tailgate.
2 away from
2. Rotate the bed extender 䊊
the cab of the truck until the extender
sits on the tailgate.
3 into the tailgate
3. Lock the buckles 䊊
latch on both sides.

The bed extender can be adjusted in the
outward position by moving the extender
along the rail.

NOTE:

WARNING

Use care when rotating extender, buckles may come in contact with the truck
bed railing.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.

Removing and installing the bed
extender
To remove or install the bed extender perform the following:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Rotate the bed extender into a vertical
position and lift straight up (to remove)
or lower straight down (to install).
To store the bed extender in the front of the
truck when not in use perform the following:
1. Position the sliding brackets past the
center of the wheel well.
2. Re-install the extender into the brackets (see above).
3. Rotate the extender to the inward position.
4. Push the brackets forward until the extender comes in contact with the front
wall of the truck box.

LTI0102

TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped)
For your convenience, tie down hooks are
placed at each corner of the truck box.
These may be used to help secure cargo
loaded into the truck box.
∙ The weight of the cargo load must be
evenly distributed over both the front
and the rear axles.
∙ All cargo should be securely fastened
with ropes or straps to prevent it from
shifting or sliding within the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

MEMO

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL
(volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . .4-11
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Difference between predicted and
actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-15
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-33
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port (models with Navigation System)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60
iPod®* player operation without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .4-68
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-71
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . . 4-72
Registering with NissanConnect®
Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Connect Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Application Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Siri® Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models without navigation system) . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models with navigation system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-78
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98

NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . 4-103
Audio system voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Information voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
My Apps voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Help voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

LHA3138

1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

6. BACK button

(brightness control) button

button**

7. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE knob

button

8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control
knob

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button
10. NAV button*
* For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual
regarding the Navigation system control
buttons.
** For additional information, refer to the
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and
the engine will not start.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.

WARNING
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.

∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.

Reference symbols:

To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.

The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or
muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

LHA3748

Touch-screen operation
Menu Item
Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters
123/ABC
Space
Delete
OK

Result
Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to
return to the previous screen.
Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page.
Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page.
Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Changes the available character set to numbers.
Inserts a space.
Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the
characters.
Completes the character input.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

LHA2773

HOW TO USE THE

BUTTON

For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual
regarding the “SiriusXM Travel Link” and
“SiriusXM Traffic” features.
For additional information, refer to
“NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” in this section.

LHA3748

To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item
Audio
Navigation
Phone & Bluetooth
System
Display
Brightness
Display Mode
Scroll Direction
Clock/Date
Time Format
Date Format
Clock Mode
Set Clock Manually
Daylight Savings
Time
Time Zone
Language
Camera Settings
Display Mode
Brightness
Contrast
Color

Result
For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.
Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will
appear.
Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are
suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Touch this key to adjust the time and date.
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Select from two possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.
Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows
you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Select a time zone using the “Time Zone” key.
Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down.
“Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Touch this key to change the language on the display.
Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Adjust touch-screen brightness.
Adjust touch-screen contrast.
Adjust touch-screen color.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item
Temperature Unit
Touchscreen click
System Beeps
Return to Factory Settings/Clear
Memory
Software Licenses
Minimize Voice Feedback
System Software Version
Traffic
SXM

Result
Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the
screen is touched.
Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Touch this key to turn ON or OFF the control voice feedback.
Touch this key to display software version information.
Touch this key display the traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to the “Audio System” in this
section.

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
button. Pressing the button again
the
will change the display to auto or night
display mode.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the display will return to the previous
display.
button for more
Press and hold the
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF
BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
KNOB
Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio
function on and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “RearView Monitor” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

REARVIEW MONITOR

LHA3670

1. ENTER/SETTING button (models without navigation)
2. CAMERA button (models with navigation)

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. Press the CAMERA button (if so
equipped) while in the R (Reverse) position
to cycle through guideline options. The radio can still be heard while the RearView
Monitor is active.
LHA3671

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located next to
1 .
the tailgate handle 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

5
Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

LHA2944

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with referA are disence to the vehicle body line 䊊
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Red line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Yellow line 䊊

3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
∙ Green line 䊊

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3672

Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.

on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.

LHA3673

Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object

LHA4513

Backing up near a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

A
object when backing up to the position 䊊
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA3639

Models without navigation system

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display
settings of the screen differs depending on
the type of screen present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without navigation system
LHA3674

Backing up behind a projecting
object
C is shown farther than the
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the poposition 䊊
C is actually at the same distance as
sition 䊊
A . The vehicle may hit the
the position 䊊

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (reverse)
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness
settings.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
For vehicles with navigation system
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (reverse)
2. Press the
panel.

button on the control

3. The screen will display the Night settings.
LHA3679

Models with navigation system
4. Turn
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button
again to display the Contrast settings.
6. Turn
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting up or down.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to
complete the adjustment.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up or down.
button again to access
5. Press the
the Auto settings.
6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the setting up or down.
∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the
RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the tailgate is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed on the tailgate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3671

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.

VENTS
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
1 , the RearView Monitor may not
camera 䊊
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA4512

Adjust air flow direction for the vents directed at the driver’s and passenger’s side
1 , driver and passenger 䊊
2 , or
windows 䊊
3 by moving the vent slide and/or
center 䊊
vent assemblies. Open or close the driver
and passenger vents by using the dial.
to open the
Move the dial toward the
vents or toward the
to close them.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.

NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA1406

Type A (if so equipped)

CONTROLS
1.

Fan speed control dial

Front window defroster button

3.
4.

Rear window defroster switch (if
so equipped)
Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial
6. Max A/C button
7. Air flow control buttons
8. A/C (air conditioner) button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Temperature control dial

LHA3167

Type B (if so equipped)

CONTROLS
1.

Fan speed control dial

Front window defroster button

3.
4.

Outside mirror defroster switch (if
so equipped)
Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial
6. Max A/C button
7. Air flow control buttons

Fan control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

The
fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.

ON position (Indicator light on)
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Air flow control buttons

Press the
when:

The air flow control dial or buttons allow
you to select the air flow outlets.

MAX — Air flows from center and side
A/C
vents with maximum cooling
(air conditioning).
— Air flows from center and side
vents.

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button to the ON position

∙ driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off)
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment and distributed through the
selected outlet.
Use the OFF position for normal heater or
air conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
button to turn on the air condithe
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
button again.
the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window or outside mirror
defroster switch (if so equipped)
For additional information about the rear
window or outside mirror defroster switch,
refer to “Rear window or outside mirror defroster switch.” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion. The indicator light on the
button will go off.
2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the

defrost/defog button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
fan control dial
windows, turn the
to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position.
position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. The
recirculation mode cannot be activated
position.
in the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the front
and rear floor outlets.
button to the OFF posi1. Press the
tion.
The
indicator
light
on
button will go off.
the
2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.

position is selected, the
∙ When the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
air flow control
36°F (2°C). If the
button is selected for more than 1 minute, the air conditioning system will
fan
continue to operate until the
control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle
is shut off, or the A/C button is used to
turn off the compressor even if the air
flow control dial is turned to a position
position. This deother than the
humidifies the air which helps defog the
mode automatiwindshield. The
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging
performance.

Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
button to activate the air condithe
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
tion.

button to the OFF posi-

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the

button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, press the
button to the ON position. Be sure to
to the OFF position for
return the
normal cooling. The indicator light on
button will go off. You may
the
also select MAX A/C for quick cooling.

are selected, the air
∙ When the or
conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36° F (2° C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
mode automatically turns off,
The
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.

air flow control button.

∙ The air conditioner is always on in
mode, regardless of whether
the
the indicator light is on or off.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the

3. Press the

button on.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.

Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows and moonroof (if so
equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or
three minutes with the windows open
to vent hot air from the passenger
compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to
cool the interior more quickly.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re) button should always
circulation (
be in the OFF position for heating and
defrosting.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

WHA0916

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4443

LHA4444

LHA4453

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

LHA4446

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)

LHA2886

Type A (if so equipped)
10. Air flow control buttons
1. Driver temperature control dial
2. A/C (air conditioner) button
3.

Front window defroster button

Fan speed control dial

11. AUTO button

5. OFF button
6.

Fresh air intake button

Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial
9. DUAL button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

LHA2611

Type B (if so equipped)
10. Air flow control buttons
1. Driver temperature control dial
2. A/C (air conditioner) button
3.

Front window defroster button

Fan speed control dial

11. AUTO button

5. OFF button
6.

Rear window defroster switch

Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial
9. DUAL button

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.

LHA3168

Type C (if so equipped)
10. Air flow control buttons
1. Driver temperature control dial
2. A/C (air conditioner) button
3.

Front window defroster button

Fan speed control dial

5. OFF button
6.
7.

Outside mirror defroster switch
Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial
9. DUAL button

11. AUTO button

WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls
to activate the air conditioner.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year
round as the system automatically works
to keep a constant temperature. Air flow
distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or
right to set the desired temperature.
Driver and passenger temperatures
can be set independently. Press DUAL
to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature control dial to the left or right
to set the desired passenger’s temperature.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.

∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, fan speed
and A/C on/off are also controlled automatically.

∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
the system may not work properly.
∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the
defroster control
switch to turn the system on. The indicator light in the button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or
right to set the desired temperature.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, turn the manual fan
control to the maximum position.
∙ As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to
return to the auto mode.
control is activated, the
∙ When the
air conditioner will automatically be
turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for
more than 1 minute, the air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the
fan control is turned OFF, the vehicle is
shut off or the A/C button is used to
turn off the compressor even if an air
is seflow button other than
lected. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The air recirculation mode automatically turns
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into
the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Turn the
fan speed control dial to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Air flow control

Press the air recirculation button
to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic mode.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front defogging mode.

Press the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the air outlet:

Fresh air intake (if so equipped)
Press the
fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger comindicator light on the
partment. The
button will come on.

Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the
fan speed
control dial to the desired position and
button to turn on the air
press the
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,
button again.
press the
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and
foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster
outlets.

LIC0515

To turn system off

OPERATING TIPS

Press the OFF button.

1 , located on the top
The sunload sensor 䊊
center of the instrument panel, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature.
Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

Rear window or outside mirror
defroster switch (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window or outside mirror defroster switch”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.

∙ When the engine coolant temperature
and outside air temperature are low, the
air flow from the foot outlets may not
operate for a maximum of 150 seconds.
However, this is not a malfunction. After
the coolant temperature warms up, air
flow from the foot outlets will operate
normally.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

RADIO

This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced
technician
with
proper
equipment.

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON
(power) or ON•OFF
position, press the
button to turn the radio on. If you listen to
the radio with the engine not running, the
ignition should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
radio reception.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first
time or the battery has been replaced, the
satellite radio may not work properly. This
is not a malfunction. Wait more than
10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and
“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band
option is selected unless optional satellite
receiver and antenna are installed and a
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
∙ The following CDs may not work
properly:
∙ Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.

∙ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.

∙ Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:

∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
LHA0099

∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
∙ The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the compartment
temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
∙ CDs that are not round
∙ CDs with a paper label
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
∙ This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC

∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA (if so
equipped) CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA
Terms
∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CDROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible
loss
in
quality.
MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
∙ The names of folders not containing
MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
display.
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.

WHA1078

Playback order chart

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart
Supported media
Supported file systems

MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate

Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Troubleshooting guide
Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long
time before the music
starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit
rate files
Moves immediately to
the next song when playing
Songs do not play back
in the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

This system cannot be used to format USB
memory devices. To format a USB device,
use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod® use

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a check mark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it
is connected during a seek operation. In
this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.
∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Bluetooth® streaming audio
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.

∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon and
Bosch.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

7. iPod MENU button
8.

BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING
button
TUNE/FOLDER control knob

and

10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11. RDM button
12. RPT button
13. VOL (volume) knob /

(power) button

14. DISP button
15. MEDIA button
16. CD button

Audio main operation

LHA3026

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.

CD eject button

2. FM•AM button
3. CD insert slot
4. Display screen
5. SCAN button
6.

SEEK/TRACK buttons

(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition and press the
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness
Contrast
Clock Adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sensitive Vol. (volume)

AUX Vol.
Language
Auto Source Change

Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and
right speakers.
Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Allows the user to set time manually.
Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as
the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the
more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting
of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Select ON or OFF for the Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is
plugged into USB port, radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change
OFF: when device is plugged into USB port, radio will stay on currently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Set

BACK button

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
“Clock Adjust”.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust
hours.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
6. Rotate the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust minutes.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
8. Press the

BACK button to finish.

DISP button
The display screen can be turned off by
pressing the DISP button. You can listen to
music while the display is off. If you want to
turn the screen on, either press the DISP
button or press the FM·AM, CD or MEDIA
button.
iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® operations. For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation without Navigation
System” in this section.

Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.

FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the
SEEK button or
TRACK button to tune from low to high or
high to low frequencies and to stop at the
next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and
the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as
well.

Press

and

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

Fast Forward) button

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.

hold

the

SEEK/TRACK

button
or
for 1.5 seconds while
the compact disc is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The
compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button
SEEK/TRACK button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK/TRACK button several times
the
to skip backward several tracks.
SEEK/TRACK button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
SEEK/TRACK butone track. Press the
ton several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
eject and the last source will be played.
button is pressed twice
When the
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD
removal. If the disc is not removed within
20 seconds, the disc will reload.

Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation System” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models without Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

5. SCAN button
6.

SEEK/CAT buttons

7. iPod MENU button
8.

BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING
button
TUNE/SCROLL control knob

and

10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11. VOL (volume) knob /
ton

(power) but-

12. DISP button
13. MEDIA button
14. XM button*

LHA4427

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)

2. RPT button

For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.

4. Display screen

CD eject button

3. RDM button

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

15. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
(power) butposition and press the
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Brightness
Contrast
Clock Adjust
On-Screen Clock
RDS Display
Speed Sensitive Vol. (volume)

AUX Vol.
Language
Auto Source Change

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Set

BACK button

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Clock Adjust”.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
hours.

FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

6. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust minutes.

If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
8. Press the

BACK button to finish.

XM band select
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last
played.
The last station played will also come on
(power) button is pressed
when the
on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the
SEEK button or
CAT
button to tune from low to high or high to
low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and
the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.

at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK/CAT button

MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK/CAT button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
SEEK/CAT button several times to
the
skip backward several tracks.
SEEK/CAT button while a
Press the
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
SEEK/CAT button
one track. Press the
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.

RPT (repeat) button

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Additional features

When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:

1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF

For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation System” in this section.

CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.

For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models without Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navigation System” in this section.

CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10. CD button
11. SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SXM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section.

Audio main operation
LHA2895

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
1.

CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

3. AUX button
4. CD insert slot
5.

Backward seek button and
Forward seek button

6. BACK button

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON-OFF button
while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or
iPod®) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF
button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

Audio settings
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Audio” key.
Use the touch-screen to adjust the following items to the desired setting:

Audio
Bass
Treble
Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Vol.

AUX Volume Level

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.
When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the
main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

SXM settings

SXM band select

To view the SXM settings:

Pressing the SXM button will change the
band as follows:

1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and
other information are displayed on the
screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown
on the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite,
if so equipped)
When the SXM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on
when the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn
the radio on.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio
is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation can be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch the “Categories” key to display a list of categories. Touch a category
displayed on the list to display options
within that category.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up
the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the
lower right corner of the screen. A screen
appears with a bar running from low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on
the right. Touch the screen at the location
of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To
return to the regular radio display screen,
touch the “OK” key.
Tuning with the TUNE knob
The radio can also be manually tuned using the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to change the channel.
SEEK tuning
When in FM or AM mode, press the
or
seek buttons to tune from low to
high or high to low frequencies and to stop
at the next broadcasting station.
When in SXM mode, press the
or
seek buttons to change the category.

3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.
Presets can also be selected by touching
the desired preset number on the screen.
LHA2899

1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can
be set for the AM band. Eighteen stations
can be set for the SXM band (six for SXM1, six
for SXM2 & six SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or
choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 &
SXM3 using the SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual or seek tuning. Press and hold
any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

LHA3085

Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if
so equipped)
The Smart Favorites feature allows the
user to designate presets, within the SXM1,
SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Favorites. When any of the Smart Favorite
presets are selected, the current track on
that station will play from the beginning of
the song.
To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate
(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favorites.

REPLAY

To replay a track from
the beginning, press
the
key. The user
can continue to press
the
key to replay
previous songs, but can
only go back as far as
the system permits. The
system will warn the
user when they cannot
skip any further back by
displaying “At the End” in
the bottom left corner of
the screen.

SKIP

To skip a track, press
the
key. “Live” will
appear in the bottom left
corner of the screen indicating the difference
from play time to live
audio.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information, refer to “1 to 6
station memory operations” in this section
regarding preset memory options.
NOTE:
• Smart Favorites will start functioning
only after the audio unit is turned on for
a few minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music channels only.

LHA3087

Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability
to replay, skip, pause or rewind the currently aired track.
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Replay Screen is prompted.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PAUSE

REWIND/
FAST
FORWARD

To pause a track, press
the
key.
To rewind/ fast forward a
track, hold the
or
key.

Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.

CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded,
the system will turn on and the compact
disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and
the compact disc will start to play.

CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3 display mode

Random/Mix

Repeat

Browse

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded
with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when
a CD is playing:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Random/Mix mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longer
highlighted.
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching
“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text
will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer
highlighted
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the
list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the
folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a
folder.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
or
seek butPress and hold the
tons for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK buttons
seek button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
seek button several times to skip
the
backward several tracks.
seek button while a CD or
Press the
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
seek button several
track. Press the
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track on a CD is skipped, the first track
on the disc is played. If the last track in a
folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button
The AUX IN audio input port accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX
button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN port.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,
the disc will reload.

Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation with Navigation System”
in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models with Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System” in this section.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4319

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the instrument
panel. Insert the USB device into the instrument panel.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation
MEDIA button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack, the MEDIA button toggles between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played can be displayed on the display
screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song
and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total
tracks in the folder are displayed on the
screen as well.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK
(Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
or
Press and hold the
SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the
audio file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to return to the beginning of the
current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
several times to skip backbutton
ward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to advance one track. Press the
several
SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM (random) button is pressed
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will
be played randomly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER
or TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.
Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of
audio files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on
the USB device.

1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF

LHA4319

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so
equipped)

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

Connecting a device to the USB
connection port

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.

The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

Audio file operation
AUX (auxiliary) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another
audio source is playing and a USB connection port device is inserted, press the AUX
button until the center display changes to
the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
USB memory was playing, press the ONOFF button to restart the USB memory.
LHA4006

Play information
Information about the audio files being
played is shown on the display screen of
the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”
to display the list of folders and files on the
USB device. Touch the name of a song on
the screen to begin playing that song.
Seeking buttons
seeking button while an
Press the
audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track.
seeking button several
Press the
times to skip backward several tracks.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Press the
seeking button while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to
seeking
advance one track. Press the
button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the
USB device is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the
play pattern can be altered so that songs
are repeated or played randomly.

Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the USB device. When the
Repeat mode is active, the text on the “Repeat” key will illuminate and the text “Repeat Track” appears. By touching the “Repeat” key once more, the text “Repeat
Folder” appears. To cancel Repeat mode,
touch the “Repeat” key until no text is illuminated.

Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random
play pattern to the USB device. When the
Random mode is active, the text “Random”
on the key will illuminate and the text “Random Folder” appears. By touching the “Random” key once more, the text “Random All”
appears. To cancel Random mode, touch
the “Random” key until no text is illuminated.

LHA4319

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB port located on the instrument
panel. Connect the iPod®-specific end of
the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of
the cable to the USB port on the vehicle. If
your iPod® supports charging via a USB
connection, its battery will be charged

while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0PC or later)

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.0.2PC or later)

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB port on the vehicle, then remove the
cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version
1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB)
(firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware
version 3.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware
version 4.3.5 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

∙ iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

∙ Now playing
∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the MEDIA button or
iPod MENU button repeatedly to switch to
the iPod® mode.

∙ Songs

If the audio system is turned off while the
iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the
audio system is turned back on.

∙ Composers

If the audio system is off, pressing the MEDIA button or iPod MENU button turns the
audio system on and plays the iPod®.
If the audio system is on, the audio system
automatically begins playing tracks from
the iPod® when it is plugged into the port.
iPod MENU button
Press the iPod MENU button while the
iPod® is connected to show the iPod® operation menu on the audio display. Scroll
through the menu list using the
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Press ENTER/SETTING button to select a
menu item. Items in the iPod® menu appear on the display in the following order:

∙ Podcasts
∙ Genres

∙ Audiobooks
∙ Shuffle songs
For additional information, refer to the
iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each
item.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons
or
SEEK/CAT or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for less than
1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current
track on the iPod® will be played.
or
SEEK/CAT or
When the
TRACK button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
iPod® will play while fast forwarding or re-

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

winding. When the button is released, the
iPod® will return to the normal play speed.
REPEAT (RPT)
When the RPT button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are
repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RANDOM (RDM)
When the RDM button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle
→ Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list
will be played randomly.
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied.

BACK button
When the
BACK button is pressed, it
returns to the previous menu.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
LHA4319

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB port located on the instrument
panel. Connect the iPod®-specific end of
the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of
the cable to the USB port on the vehicle. If
your iPod® supports charging via a USB
connection, its battery will be charged

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)*
∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4007

Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
iPod® was playing, pressing the ON·OFF
button will start the iPod®.
AUX button
When the AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPod® connected, the
system will turn on. If another audio source
is playing and the iPod® is connected, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the iPod® mode.

∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums
∙ Genres
∙ Songs
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Podcasts
Shuffle and repeat play mode
LHA2907

Interface
The interface for iPod® operation shown on
the vehicle’s audio system display screen is
similar to the iPod® interface. Use the
touch-screen, BACK button or the scrolling
knob to navigate the menus on the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”
key to bring up the iPod® interface.

While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern
can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random
play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle
mode is active, the text is illuminated and
will display “Shuffle songs” text above the
“Shuffle” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch
the “Shuffle” key again until the text is no
longer illuminated.

Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat
mode is active, the text is illuminated and
will display “Repeat song” text above the
“Repeat” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch
the “Repeat” key again until the text is no
longer illuminated.
SEEK buttons
Press the SEEK button
or
to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK button
or
for 1.5 seconds while a track is
playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.

Depending on the iPod® model, the following items may be available on the menu list
screen. For additional information, refer to
the iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each
menu item.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.

LHA2279

Scrolling menus
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs in the music menu, it is
possible to scroll the list by the first character in the name. To activate character indexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the
upper right corner of the screen. Turn the
TUNE knob to choose the number or letter
to jump to in the list and then press the
ENTER/AUDIO button.
If no character is selected after a few seconds, the display returns to normal.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA2775

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Add Phone or Device” key.
This same screen can be accessed to
remove, replace or select a different
Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.

Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3
button for play and the Preset 4 button for
pause.

LHA2773

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

NOTE:
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
You
can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

Audio main operation
LHA2844

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset.

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen.

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
the disc. Never touch the surface of the
disc.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AM → FM1 → FM2 → (XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped)) → (SM1 →
SM2 → SM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped))
→ CD* → USB/iPod®* (if so equipped) →
Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.

* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase
or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch
LHA2559

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
The audio system can be operated using
the controls on the steering wheel.
1. Volume control switch
2. MODE select switch
3. Tuning switch

MODE select switch
Push the MODE select switch to change
the mode in the following sequence:

While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or
folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
provides a different function than a tilting
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to seek up or down to the next station.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (if
so equipped)
XM (if so equipped)
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to go to the next or previous channel.
SXM (if so equipped)
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to go to the next or previous channel.
iPod®
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
CD
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files).
USB
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder number.
Bluetooth® Audio

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone
Integration technology. This allows many
compatible Smartphone applications to
be displayed and easily controlled through
the vehicle’s touch-screen.

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.

NOTE:

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to reverse or fast forward the current
song.

A compatible smartphone and registration is required to use mobile applications or to access connected features of
certain vehicle applications.

ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can
be removed. When you need to remove the
antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION
∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle
operation.
∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed
before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS
To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is
necessary for the user to register. In order to
register, visit the NissanConnect® Mobile Apps
website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect or www.nissan.ca/
fr/connect and sign up or create an account
through the prompts on the NissanConnect
Mobile Apps. Once registered, download the
NissanConnect Mobile Apps from your compatible phone’s application download source
and then log into the application. If you already
have an account created through the App,
please log in.

SIRI® EYES FREE
CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smartphone must be connected via Bluetooth®
or USB to the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System with Navigation System” in
this section.
NOTE:
Apple iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be
plugged in via USB for NissanConnect
Mobile Apps to function.
For Android phones, NissanConnect Mobile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
paired via Bluetooth®.

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnect App
will search your phone to determine which
compatible applications are currently
installed. The user will then choose which
apps they want to bring into their vehicle
from the list of apps within the “Manage My
Apps” section of the NissanConnect App on
their smartphone. The vehicle will then
download the in-vehicle interface for each of
these compatible applications. Once downloaded, the user can access their selected
smartphone applications through the vehicle touch-screen. For additional informa-

tion, refer to www.nissanusa.com/connect
or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect
or
www.nissan.ca/fr/connect regarding application availability.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interaction by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
TALK switch on the steering
from the
wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
∙ For getting best results, always update
your device to the latest software version.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

REQUIREMENTS

Models without navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Initialization” in
this section.

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, the switch operation select
screen is displayed.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.

LHA2589

SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
TALK switch on the steering
pushing
wheel.
Models with navigation system
1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Connecting procedure” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is established, push and hold the
TALK switch to activate the Siri Eyes
Free function.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for
Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action
can also be changed from the
Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Changing
Siri® Eyes Free Settings (models without navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

TALK

2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the
end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to
extend the session.
Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the
switch.

TALK

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to resume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example 2 – Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming
text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or
TALK switch to
push and hold the
reply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text message” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models without
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models with
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.
5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set the activation.

2. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Siri” and
then press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” using the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then
press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch
on the steering wheel

Audio Source does not change automatically to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode

Play, pause, next track, previous track or
play timer does not work
Cannot hear any music/audio being
played back from a connected iPhone®
Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direction
guidance from a connected iPhone®
Cannot receive text message notifications
on the vehicle audio system
Cannot reply to text message notifications
by Siri Eyes Free

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Models without navigation system:
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must
TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the
push and hold the
setting is “Short Press”, a short push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook
or other 3rd party music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may
degrade performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the MODE select
switch on the steering wheel.
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook
or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod®
mode.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod®
mode.
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device
name, like “My Car”. Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
on the steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TALK switch

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.

WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended.
Exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

LHA3143

Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatic ally to the system, consult the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
device operation.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ For additional information, you can visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.

– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pressed before the initialization
completes, the system will announce
“Hands-free phone system not ready” and
will not react to voice commands.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
button located
press and release the
on the steering wheel. After the tone
sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.

∙ If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the NISSAN
Voice Recognition session. You can also
button on the
press and hold the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any
time to end the NISSAN Voice Recognition session. Whenever the NISSAN
Voice Recognition session is cancelled,
a double beep is played to indicate you
have exited the system.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, press the Volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.
∙ In most cases you can interrupt the
voice feedback to speak the next combutton on
mand by pressing the
the steering wheel.
∙ To use the system faster, you may
speak the second level commands with
the main menu command on the main
butmenu. For example, press the
ton and after the tone say, “Call Redial.”
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
button on the steering
pressing the
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
button and after
example, press the
the tone say, “Call Redial”.

LHA2561

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate a Voice Recognition session or answer an incoming
call.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

If the operation of “Siri” is set
to “Short Press” on the
Bluetooth® setting menu,
pressing and holding
the
button initiates a
Voice Recognition session for
the Hands-Free Phone
operation. For additional
information, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this
section.
You can also use the
button to interrupt the system feedback and give a
command at once. For additional information, refer to
“Voice Commands” and “During a call” in this section.

PHONE/END
While the voice recognition
system is active, press and
button for
hold the
5 seconds to quit the voice
recognition system at any
time.
Tuning switch
While using the voice recognition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manually control the phone system.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item
Bluetooth ON/OFF
On
Off
Add Phone
Delete Phone
Replace Phone
Select Phone

Result
Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
Turns Bluetooth® functionality on
Turns Bluetooth® functionality off
Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and
complete the connection process.
Delete a phone currently connected to the system.
Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voice tags that were recorded
using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.
Choose a phone from a list of previously connected or currently connected phones.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to your cellular phone’s Owner’s Manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

VOICE COMMANDS

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
button and say “Phone” to
Press the
bring up the phone command menu. The
available options are:

The following commands are available under “Phonebook”:

The following commands are available under “Recent Calls”:

∙ (A Name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring
up a list of options for that phonebook
entry. The system will say the name it
interpreted based on the voice command provided. If the name is incorrect,
say “Correction” to hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number
or “Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Record Name” to record a name for the phonebook entry.
Say “Delete Recording” to delete a recorded name for the phonebook entry.

∙ Incoming
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the incoming call will
be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of incoming calls.

∙ Call
∙ Phonebook
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Messaging (if so equipped)
∙ Show Applications (if so equipped)
∙ Select Phone

“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.

∙ List Names
Speak this command to have the system
list the names in the phonebook one by
one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to dial the
number of the current name or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to
move through the list alphabetically. Say
“Record Name” to record a name for the
current phonebook entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a recorded name for
the current phonebook entry.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Missed
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of
missed calls.

∙ Outgoing
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of outgoing calls.
∙ Redial
Speak this command to call the last
number dialed.
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Show Applications” (if so
equipped)
Speak this command to display list of
smartphone apps available.
NOTE:
Compatible smartphone and registration necessary to access applications.

“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to
use from a list of those phones connected
to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to
the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System:
button on the steering

“Messaging”(if so equipped)

1. Press the
wheel.

Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, refer to “Text messaging” in this section.

2. The system will prompt you for a command. Say “Call”.

∙ “(A Name)” — Speak the name of a
phonebook entry to place a call to that
entry. The system will respond with the
name it interpreted from your command and will prompt you to confirm
that the name is correct. Say “Dial” to
initiate the call or “Correction” to hear
another name from the phonebook.
∙ “Phone Number” — Speak this command to place a call by inputting numbers. For 7– to 10–digit phone number,
speak the numbers. Say “Correction” at
any time in the process to correct a
misspoken or misinterpreted number.
For phone numbers with more digits or
special characters, say “Special Number”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered. Available special
characters are “start”, “pound”, “plus”,
and “pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to
initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any
time in the process to correct a misspoken or misinterpreted number or character.

3. Select one of the available voice commands to continue:

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Re-dialing
”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it
available, otherwise the number being
re-dialed will be displayed.
∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to
dial the number of the last incoming
call. The system will display “Calling
back ”. The name of
the phonebook entry will be displayed if
it available, otherwise the number being called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is
displayed on the control panel display.
Press the
Press the

button to accept the call.
button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the
button
to access additional options. Speak one of
the following commands:

While the second call is active, pressing
the
button will allow the same commands that are available during any call as
well as two additional commands:

∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed
by the digits to enter digits during the
phone call.

∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to
hold the second call and switch back to
the original call.

∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the
command to mute or unmute the system.

∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command
to stay with the second call and end the
original call.
button to accept the call.
Press the
Press the
button to reject the call.

∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To
transfer the call back from the handset
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
button and
System, press the
confirm when prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call
waiting functionality. If a call is received
while another call is already active, a message will be displayed on the screen. Press
button to hold the active call and
the
switch to the second call. Press the
button to reject the second call.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the
ton.

but-

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.

Sending a text message:

NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details and instructions.

1. Press the
wheel.

NOTE:

4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:

Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check the
phone’s screen during Bluetooth® pairing.
For some phones, you may need to enable
‘Notifications’ in the phone’s Bluetooth®
menu for text messages to appear on the
headunit. For additional information, refer
to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text
message integration requires that the
phone support MAP (Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text
messages. Some phones may not support
all text messaging features. For additional
information,
please
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s
Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.

button on the steering

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

∙ To (a name)
∙ Enter Number
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
∙ “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For additional information on setting and
managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to scroll through all text messages if more than one are available. Press
button to exit the text message
the
screen. Press the
button to access
the following options for replying to the text
message:

∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).

∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.

NOTE:

∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use
the
TUNE/FOLDER
or
TUNE/SCROLL
knob
to
select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button:
∙ Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.

∙ Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Text Message (if so equipped)
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.

∙ Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the displayed list. The system will ask to confirm before deleting the phone.

∙ New Text Sound (if so equipped)
Select to adjust the volume of the
sound that plays when a new text is
received by a phone connected to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
The setting all the way to the left indicates that the new text sound will be
muted.

∙ Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the displayed list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook
for the phone being deleted will be
saved as long as the new phone’s
phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
∙ Select Phone
Select to connect to a previously connected phone from the displayed list.
∙ Show Incoming Calls
Incoming call information may be displayed on the center display screen.
∙ Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s
phonebook.

∙ Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)
Incoming text messages may be displayed on the center display screen. Select “None” to have no display of incoming text messages.
∙ Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)
Select to set a custom message that
will be available with the standard options when sending a text message. To
set a custom message, send a text
message to your own phone number
while the phone is connected to the
system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be
set while the vehicle is stationary.

∙ Auto Reply (if so equipped)
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text
message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.
∙ Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.
∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so
equipped)
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROL
While using the Voice Recognition system,
it is possible to select menu options by
using the steering wheel controls instead
of speaking voice commands. To activate
butmanual control mode, press the
ton on the steering wheel to access the
phone menu and then push either up or
tuning switch .
down on the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
The manual control mode does not allow
dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook
or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice
Recognition, exit the manual control mode
button.
by pressing and holding the
At that time, pressing the
button will
start the Hands Free Phone System.

WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the
engine.

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone
turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a
phone number using your voice is possible.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the invehicle phone module before using the
hands-free phone system.

LHA3144

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ If the hands-free phone system seems
to be malfunctioning, refer to “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. You can
also
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ Refer to the cellular phone owner’s
manual regarding the telephone
charges, cellular phone antenna and
body, etc.
∙ The signal strength display on the
monitor will not coincide with the signal
strength display of some cellular
phones.

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements
of
the
Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Bosch.

One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
button and after
example, press the
the tone say, “Call Redial”.

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate
various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the Voice Recognition system,
the system voice can be interrupted to allow the user to speak commands. While
the system is speaking, press the
button on the steering wheel. The system
voice will stop and a tone will be heard.
After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).

LHA2773

] button on the control

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

5. Initiate the connecting process from
the handset. The system will display
the message: “Confirm on your
Bluetooth device that the PIN XXXXXX is
displayed”. If the PIN is displayed on
your Bluetooth® device, select “Pair” to
complete the pairing process.
For additional information, refer to the
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the
panel.

button on the control

NOTE:

RECEIVING A CALL

To scroll quickly through the list, touch
the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of
the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to
choose a letter or number and then
press the ENTER/AUDIO button. The list
will move to the first entry that begins
with that number or letter.

When a call is placed to the connected
phone, the display will change to phone
mode.

MAKING A CALL

icon on the screen.
∙ Touch the
To reject the incoming call, either:

To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control
panel. The “Phone” screen will appear
on the display.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

2. Select one of the following options to
make a call:

3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list.

∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an
entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

4. The number of the entry will be displayed on the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing.

∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the
incoming, outgoing or missed.
∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from
the vehicle.
”: Input the phone number manu∙ “
ally using a keypad displayed on the
screen. For additional information, refer
to “How to use the touch-screen” in this
section.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To accept the incoming call, either:
∙ Press the
wheel, or

button on the steering

∙ Press the
wheel, or

button on the steering

∙ Touch the

icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options
are available on the screen:
∙ “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of
the phone call over to the handset.
∙ “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the microphone. Select again to unmute the microphone.
icon
∙ Phone
Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

NOTE:

To end a phone call, select the phone
icon on the screen or press the
button on the steering wheel.

This feature is automatically disabled if the
connected device does not support the
Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone’s
Owner’s Manual for details and instructions.

Sending a text message:

NOTE:
Many phones may require special permission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiving and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text messaging features. For additional information,
please
refer
to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compatibility information, as well as your device’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface.

1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ To (a name)
∙ Enter Number
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

∙ “Call me”

The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use
buttons to scroll through all
the
text messages if more than one are availbutton to exit the text
able. Press the
message screen. Press the
button to
access the following options for replying to
the text message:

∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
∙ “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For additional information on setting and
managing custom text messages, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

LHA2844
Menu Item
Phone Settings
Connect New Device
Select Connected Device
Replace Connected Device
Delete Connected Device
Bluetooth

Result
For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and adjust the following settings as desired:
∙ Start Siri® by:
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set how Siri® is operated on the steering
wheel.
∙ Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen.
∙ Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s
phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the
phonebook on the SIM card. Select
“Both” to use both sources.

∙ Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to
the vehicle from the chosen source.
∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phonebook entry for use with the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ Phone Notifications for:
Notifications may be displayed on the
center display screen.

∙ Auto Reply Message:
Touch to indicate preferred message to
be sent when “Auto Reply” function is
activated.
∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature:
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of
the vehicle signature to outgoing messages.
∙ Custom Text Messages:
Touch this option to select a custom
message to edit. There are 4 customer
message slots available.

∙ Text Messaging (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the text message functionality on or off.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

∙ Show Incoming Text for:
Text notifications may be displayed on
the center display screen. Touch “Off” to
turn off all text notifications.

The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

∙ Auto Reply:
Touch to toggle the auto reply functionality on or off.

Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Voice Recognition System allows hands-free operation of the systems
equipped on this vehicle, such as the
phone and navigation systems.

4. Voice and display feedback are provided when the command is accepted.
∙ If the command is not recognized, the
system announces: “Command not
recognized”. Repeat the command in a
clear voice.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
button located on the
press the
steering wheel. When prompted, speak the
command for the system you wish to activate. The command given is picked up by
the microphone and performed when it is
properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to inform you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice
button is pressed
commands. If the
before the initialization completes, the system will announce: “Voice Recognition System not ready. Please wait.”

∙ If you want to cancel the command or
go back to the previous menu of combutton. The sysmands, press the
tem will announce: “Canceling Voice
Recognition” or “Go back” depending on
the current menu level.
LHA2589

Giving voice commands
1. Press the

button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a
category like phone or a command like
points of interest followed by a brand
name”. A list of available commands is
then spoken by the system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon
on the display changes, speak a command. Available commands are discussed in this section.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, use the volume control
switches on the steering wheel or the
volume knob on the control panel.
∙ The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel display:
1. Press the [

] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

Operating tips

How to say numbers

To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be
used for “0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the
following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say
dial number and then speak the phone
number in any of the following formats:

∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

LHA4373

SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the
following systems:
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
∙ Navigation
∙ Audio
∙ Information

∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two
oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single
digits. Also, full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For example, you cannot say
555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.

∙ My Apps
∙ Help
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System voice commands:
1. Press the

button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say “Phone” to access various
phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off.
Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and
the vehicle is stationary, the system announces: “There is no phone connected.
Would you like to connect a phone now?”
Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is
set to “On”, the following voice commands
are available:
∙ Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in
which you are trying to call. System will
confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to
initiate dialing.
∙ Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.
After the number is entered, say “Dial”
to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to
correct the number entered. Say “Go
Back” to return to the main menu.
∙ List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call the number of
the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”
to send a text message to the number
of the phonebook entry. Say “Next Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, where
the same options will then be available.

∙ Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional
command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display
a list of such calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry displayed on the screen to dial that number or say “Next Page” to view entries
on the next page (if available).
∙ Redial
Redials the last called number.
∙ Read Text
Reads an incoming text message.
∙ Send Text
Sends a text message.
∙ Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual
controls to continue”. Use manual controls to change the active phone from
among the listed phones connected
to the vehicle.
∙ Siri (if so equipped)
The system replies “starting Siri”. For
additional information, refer to “Operating Siri® Eyes Free” in this section.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
with Navigation System” in this section.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are available for the navigation system:
∙ Street Address (address)
∙ Points of Interest (name)
∙ POI by Category

∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

Allows user to select radio band
∙ Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
AM frequency
∙ Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
FM frequency

Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)

∙ Address Book
∙ Previous Destinations
∙ Enter Address in Steps
∙ Cancel Route

∙ CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
∙ Play Song (name)

For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice commands:

2. Say “Audio”

For additional information, refer to “Audio
system” in this section.

∙ SXM channel (number)

∙ Home

1. Press the

3. Speak a command from the following
available commands:

button.

Allows user to select song name to be
played
∙ Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
∙ Play Album (name)

The following voice commands are available for the information functions of the
navigation system:
∙ Traffic
∙ Fuel Prices
∙ Stocks
∙ Movie Listings
∙ Current Weather
∙ Weather Map
∙ 5 — day Forecast
∙ 6 — hour Forecast
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this
voice command. For additional information, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile Apps”
in this section.

Allows user to select album name to
be played

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The following voice commands can be
spoken to have the system provide instructions and tips for using the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.

The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions
given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

∙ List Commands
∙ What Can I Say?
∙ General Help
∙ Go Back
∙ Quit
∙ Exit

Symptom/error message
Solution
The system responds “Command
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”
Not Recognized” or the system fails
menu.
to recognize the command
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
correctly.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Automatic transmission
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Manual transmission (M/T)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Automatic transmission (A/T)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-19
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system. . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-41
Hill start assist system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Rear sonar system (RSS) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 5-42
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-45

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the liftgate or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
∙ If a special body, camper, or other
equipment is added for recreational
or other usage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent
carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. Do not occupy these areas while
the engine is running even if the vehicle is parked. Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also
generate carbon monoxide.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.

WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away
from
the
exhaust
system
components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check all four tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Starting and driving 5-3

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure of your tires are adjusted. After
the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn
off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the odometer when the low tire pressure warning
light is illuminated and low tire pressure
is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns off when the low tire
pressure warning light turns off. The low
tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is
displayed each time the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position as long as
the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Check tire pressure
warning message” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning is not
displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.
∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning appears
each time the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position as long as the low tire
pressure warning light remains illuminated.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual
for changing a flat tire.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function
properly.

Starting and driving 5-5

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement
and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However,
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
safety precautions” in this section.

5-6 Starting and driving

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return
to the road surface. When all tires are on
the road surface, steer the vehicle to
stay in the appropriate driving lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this

Starting and driving 5-7

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may
cause a collision and result in personal
injury.
∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.

5-8 Starting and driving

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under
the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in
alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most
people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
deep water or mud as your NISSAN is
mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-wheel drive models are
less capable than 4-wheel drive models for
rough road driving and extrication when
stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING
∙ Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
backward.
∙ Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may
stall. If you drive down them, you may
not be able to control your speed. If
you drive across them, you may roll
over.
∙ Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.

∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a dropoff or other hazard that could cause
an accident.
∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill, never
attempt to turn around. Your vehicle
could tip or roll over. Always back
straight down in R (Reverse) gear.
Never back down in N (Neutral) or with
the clutch depressed (manual transmission vehicles), using only the
brake, as this could cause loss of
control.
∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could
cause your brakes to overheat and
fade, resulting in loss of control and
an accident. Apply brakes lightly and
use a low gear to control your speed.
Use the hill descent control feature (if
so equipped).
∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will
not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.

∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo
area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with
tires larger than specified in this
manual. This could cause your vehicle
to roll over.
∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel when driving off-road.
The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.
∙ Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may become hot.
∙ Lower your speed when encountering
strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure better vehicle control.

Starting and driving 5-9

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
engaged (if so equipped).

∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your NISSAN 4-wheel drive
vehicle has a higher center of gravity
than a passenger car. The vehicle is
not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
could result in loss of control and/or a
rollover accident.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment even if
the other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with 4WD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

5-10 Starting and driving

∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted, or radial), and tread pattern on
all four wheels. Install tire chains on
the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.
∙ Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For
additional information, refer to “Wet
brakes” in this section.
∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.

∙ Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional
information, refer to “Maintenance
under severe operating conditions” in
the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

IGNITION SWITCH
To remove the key from the ignition switch:

WARNING

1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the ON
position.

∙ Never remove the ignition key or place
the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock (for models with a steering
lock mechanism). This may cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle
and could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition.
If the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position after the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position or when the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key.
WSD0041

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so the ignition
switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key removed until the shift
lever is moved to the P (Park) position.
When removing the key from the ignition,
make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
If the shift lever is not returned to P (Park)
position, the ignition switch cannot be
placed in the LOCK position.

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the
ON position.
3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
The shift lever is designed so it cannot be
moved out of P (Park) and into any of the
other gear positions if the ignition key is
placed in the OFF position or if the key is
removed from the switch.
The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.

Starting and driving 5-11

KEY POSITIONS

There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the ignition
switch. When the ignition is in the OFF
position, the steering wheel is not locked
(for models with a steering lock mechanism).

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (Not used) (1)
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is
not running.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked,
it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key
to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the
steering wheel slightly right and left.
If the key will not turn from the LOCK
position, turn the steering wheel to the
left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder.

ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
WSD0052

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (M/T) (if
so equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that
helps prevent accidental removal of the
key while driving.
The key can only be removed when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
On M/T models, to turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position from the ACC or ON
position, place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, push the key in, then place the
ignition switch in the LOCK position.

5-12 Starting and driving

START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the key. It
automatically returns to the ON position.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so
equipped), and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.

If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Check that all doors are closed.
∙ Position seat and
restraints/headrests.

adjust

head

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten the seat belt and ask all passengers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the key is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to
“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Automatic transmission:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any
of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or if the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Manual transmission:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
while cranking the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by placing the
ignition switch in the START position.
Release the key when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.

Starting and driving 5-13

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and hold it and then crank the
engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Crank the engine for
5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by placing the
ignition in the START position. Release the key when the engine starts.
If the engine starts, but fails to run,
repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, turn the key off and wait
10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.

5-14 Starting and driving

CAUTION
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
∙ To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
The A/T in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and
smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.
The automatic transmission is designed
so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to
any drive position while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of the
other gear positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position.

LSD0151

To move the shift lever:
Press the button while depressing
the brake pedal
Press the button to shift
Shift without depressing the brake
pedal

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever out of
the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-15

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position for any reason while the vehicle is
in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the
ignition switch cannot be placed in the
LOCK position and the key cannot be removed from the ignition switch. Move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the
ignition switch can be placed in the LOCK
position.
P (Park)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped.

5-16 Starting and driving

The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park).

D (Drive)

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

3 (Third gear)

R (Reverse)

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.

Use this position for all normal forward
driving.

Use this position for driving up and down
long slopes where engine braking would
be advantageous.
Do not downshift into the 3 position at
speeds over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 3 position.
2WD:
99 mph (160 km/h)
4H:
93 mph (150 km/h)
4LO:
34 mph (55 km/h)
2 (Second gear)
Use this position for hill climbing or engine
braking on downhill grades.
Do not downshift into the 2 position at
speeds over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 2 position.

2WD:

To push the shift lock release, complete the
following procedure:

62 mph (100 km/h)

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.

4H:
59 mph (95 km/h)

2. Apply the parking brake.

4LO:

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.

21 mph (35 km/h)
1 (Low gear)

4. Use a protective cloth on the tip of a
small screwdriver before inserting it in
the shift lock release slot and pushing
down.

Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or slow driving through deep snow,
sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.
Do not downshift into the 1 position at
speeds over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 1 position.
2WD:
37 mph (60 km/h)
4H:
37 mph (60 km/h)
4LO:
12 mph (20 km/h)

LSD0141

Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift lever, release the shift
lock. The shift lever can be moved to N
(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will
be locked unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This allows the
vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift
lock release.
6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steering wheel (for
models with a steering lock mechanism).
7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the
desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have the automatic transmission
system checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-17

OFF:

WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.

Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.

WSD0045

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically “reset” to overdrive
ON.

ON:

With the engine running and
the shift lever in the D (Drive)
position, the transmission upshifts into overdrive as vehicle
speed increases.

Overdrive does not engage until the engine has reached operating temperature.

5-18 Starting and driving

For driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking is
necessary push the overdrive
switch once. The Overdrive OFF
indicator light in the instrument
panel comes on at this time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a
gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable
shift shocks as the transmission shifts into
and out of overdrive repeatedly. In this
case, depress the overdrive switch to turn
the overdrive off. The Overdrive OFF indicator light in the instrument panel comes on
at this time.
When driving conditions change, depress
the overdrive switch to turn the overdrive
on.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time with the overdrive off. This reduces fuel economy.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.

CAUTION
∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may cause
clutch damage.
∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
∙ Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.

WSD0154

5 - speed

Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or
downshifting, depress the clutch pedal
fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then
release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the
shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed before the transmission is
shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur.

LSD0148

6 - speed
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th (if so equipped) gear in
sequence according to vehicle speed.
To back up, depress the shift lever and then
move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
On the 5-speed manual transmission
model, you cannot shift directly from the
5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N
(Neutral), then in to R (Reverse) after stopping the vehicle completely.

Starting and driving 5-19

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral),
then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress
the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First).
If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel
drive, refer to “Transfer case shifting procedures” in this section.

Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift
speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
∙ For QR25DE 2-wheel drive models:
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th

mph (km/h)
11 (17)
15 (24)
24 (38)
35 (56)

5-20 Starting and driving

∙ For VQ40DE 4-wheel drive models and
4-wheel drive models (2H and 4H position):
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

mph (km/h)
11 (17)
17 (27)
25 (40)
32 (51)
45 (72)

Suggested maximum speed in
each gear

Allowable maximum speed in each gear:
2–wheel drive models (QR25DE engine)
GEAR

mph (km/h)

1st

34 (54)

2nd

58 (94)

3rd

89 (144)

4th

—

5th

—

2–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is
not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

GEAR

mph (km/h)

1st

35 (56)

2nd

60 (97)

Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For level
road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe
posted speed limits, and drive according to
the road conditions, which will ensure safe
operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle
control.

3rd

87 (141)

4th

—

5th

—

4–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)
2H/4H position
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

mph (km/h)
33 (54)
58 (93)
84 (135)
—
—
—

PARKING BRAKE
4L position
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

WARNING
mph (km/h)
12 (20)
22 (35)
32 (51)
43 (70)
55 (89)
—

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.

LSD2755

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up
A .
䊊
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
Automatic transmission models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-21

CRUISE CONTROL
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
B and
lever slightly, press the button 䊊
lower the lever completely.

∙ If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
ON•OFF switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

∙ The SET indicator light may blink when
the ON•OFF switch is turned on while
pushing the ACCEL•RES, COAST•SET, or
CANCEL switch (located on the steering
wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

WARNING
LSD2753

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. ACCEL•RES switch

5-22 Starting and driving

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.

2. COAST•SET switch

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.

3. CANCEL switch

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

4. ON•OFF switch

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET
indicator light in the instrument panel
then blinks to warn the driver.

∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise
control is set. Should this occur, depress
the clutch pedal and turn the ON•OFF
switch off immediately. Failure to do so
may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON•OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light
in the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST•SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes
out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator
light goes out.
∙ Turn the ON•OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the instrument panel go out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument
panel goes out if:
∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal (if
so equipped) while pushing the ACCEL•RES or COAST•SET switch. The preset
speed is deleted from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual
transmission), or move the shift lever to
N (Neutral) (automatic transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the COAST•SET switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL•RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL•RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed
increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST•SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST•SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST•SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL•RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-23

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.

5-24 Starting and driving

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
, use
∙ For vehicles equipped with
4H or 4L position only when necessary.
4-wheel drive operation lowers fuel
economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-25

USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers
used by some states for emissions
testing), or similar equipment even if
the other two wheels are raised off the
ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with 4WD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.

5-26 Starting and driving

CAUTION
∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or
4LO position on dry hard surface
roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in
4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary
noise, tire wear and increased fuel
consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on
when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
– In the 4LO position for automatic
transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the brake
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
– In the 4LO position for manual
transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the clutch
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING
PROCEDURES
The part-time 4WD system provides three
positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can
select the desired drive mode according to
the driving conditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift
Switch Position

Wheels Driven

4WD shift

Indicator Light
Transfer 4LO position

For driving on dry,
paved roads (Economy
drive)

Rear wheels
2WD
4 wheels
4H

Neutral

*1
May blink

4LO

Use Conditions

4 wheels

Illuminated

For driving on rocky,
sandy or snowcovered roads
Neutral disengages the
automatic transmission (A/T) mechanical
parking lock, which will
allow the vehicle to roll.
Do not leave the transfer shift position in N
(Neutral).*2

For use when maximum power and traction is required (for example, on steep
grades or rocky, sandy,
muddy roads)

4WD Shift Procedure
Move the 4WD switch.
2WD <—> 4H
4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer
shift position engaged.

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. For A/T vehicles: Shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal
depressed.
For manual transmission (M/T) vehicles:
Shift the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the clutch depressed.
3. For A/T vehicles: Depress and turn the
4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the
brake pedal depressed.
For M/T vehicles: Depress and turn the
4WD switch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch
pedal depressed.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS
YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE
SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL) FOR A/T VEHICLES. FOR M/T VEHICLES YOU MUST MOVE
THE SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL). *3

*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the transfer 4LO position indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the
4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the
indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.
- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

Starting and driving 5-27

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch off.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. Apply the parking brake, for A/T vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For M/T vehicles,
move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed on A/T vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on M/T vehicles, move the 4WD shift switch to
the desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be on and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for
the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
indicator light will also
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The
turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.

5-28 Starting and driving

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used
to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on
the driving conditions. There are three
types of drive modes available, 2WD, 4H and
4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls
the transfer case operation. Rotate the
switch to move between each mode, 2WD,
4H and 4LO.
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle
MUST be stationary, shift the shift lever
to N (Neutral), and for A/T vehicles depress the brake pedal or for M/T vehicles
depress the clutch pedal. The switch
must be depressed and turned when
changing into or out of 4LO.

WARNING
∙ When parking, apply the parking
brake before stopping the engine and
make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning
light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle
could unexpectedly move even if the
A/T is in the P (Park) position.

∙ The transfer 4LO position indicator
light must stop blinking and remain
illuminated or turn off before shifting
the transmission into gear. If the shift
lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)
position to any other gear when the
transfer 4LO position indicator light is
blinking, the vehicle may move
unexpectedly.

CAUTION

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch
when making a turn or reversing.
∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) while driving on
steep downhill grades. Use the engine
brake and low A/T gears 2 (Second
gear) or 1 (Low gear), or M/T (1st gear
or 2nd gear) for engine braking.

∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
wheels spinning.

∙ The 4H position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will
cause increased fuel consumption
and higher oil temperatures, and
could damage drivetrain components.
Speeds
over
62
mph
(100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on
dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may
cause unnecessary noise and tire
wear. NISSAN recommends driving in
the 2WD position under these
conditions.

∙ The 4LO position provides maximum
power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h).

∙ The 4WD transfer case may not be
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low
ambient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may
blink even when the 4WD shift switch
is shifted. After driving for a while you
can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO.

Starting and driving 5-29

When driving on rough roads:

∙ When the vehicle is stopped after
making a turn, you may feel a slight
jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral) or P (Park). This occurs because the transfer clutch is released
and not because of a malfunction.

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
∙ Drive carefully according to the road
surface conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck:

CAUTION

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
Do not move the 4WD shift switch
when making a turn or reversing.

∙ Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped).
Turn the switch ON while the vehicle is
stationary and apply the throttle to try
to free the vehicle.
∙ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the
vehicle back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) gears.
∙ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place
stones or wooden blocks under the
tires. Then try the recovery procedures
above. Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION
∙ Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
will sink deep into the mud, making it
difficult to free the vehicle.
∙ Avoid shifting gears with the engine
running at high speeds as this may
cause malfunction.

5-30 Starting and driving

LSD0145

4WD shift switch operations
∙ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the
2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on
driving conditions.
∙ If the 4WD shift switch is operated
while making a turn, accelerating or
decelerating or if the key switch is
turned off while in the 4H or 4LO position, you may feel a jolt. This is not
abnormal.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch
while driving on steep downhill
grades. Use the engine brake and low
automatic transmission gears 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) or manual
transmission (1st gear or 2nd gear) for
engine braking.
∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
with the rear wheels spinning.
∙ Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the
vehicle speed is less than 62 mph
(100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system.
∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving.

∙ If the 4WD warning light comes on, the
4WD shift indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

LSD0147

4WD shift indicator light
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in
the odometer display.
The light should turn off within 1 second
after placing the ignition switch in the ON
position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift
indicator light will illuminate the position
selected by the 4WD shift switch.
∙ The 4WD shift indicator light may
blink while shifting from one drive
mode to the other. When the shifting
is completed, the 4WD shift indicator
light will come on.

If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD
shift switch is shifted to the 4H position
at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD
mode may be being engaged due to
malfunctioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and
the 4WD warning light comes on, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

4WD warning light
Warning light

Comes on

Blinks
slowly

Comes on or
blinks when:
There is a malfunction in the
4–wheel drive
system
The difference
in wheel rotation is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.
The 4WD warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
It turns off soon after the engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is ON, the
warning light will either remain illuminated
or blink.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
shift indicator light goes out.
A large difference between the diameters
of front and rear wheels will make the
warning light blink slowly (about once per
2 seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch
into 2WD and do not drive fast.

CAUTION
∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks
slowly during operation, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It
is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not
recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on.

Starting and driving 5-31

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
∙ When the warning light comes on, the
2WD mode may be engaged even if
the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning,
the 4WD mode will not be engaged
even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.
∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or
4LO position on dry hard surface
roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in
4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary
noise, tire wear and increased fuel
consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on
when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:
– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
– In the 4LO position for automatic
transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the brake
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.

5-32 Starting and driving

– In the 4LO position for manual
transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the
N (Neutral) position with the clutch
pedal depressed and shift the 4WD
shift switch to 2WD.
∙ If the warning light is still on after the
above operation, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ The transfer case may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warning
light blinking.

The E-Lock system can provide additional
traction and should only be used when a
vehicle has become or is becoming stuck.
This system operates by electronically
“locking” the two rear drive wheels together, allowing them to turn at the same
speed. The system is used when it is not
possible to free a stuck vehicle even when
using the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles).
When added traction is required, activate
the E-Lock system by pushing the switch
ON. For additional information, refer to
“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual. Once the
system fully engages, the indicator light in
the instrument panel will remain ON. When
the system is activated, both rear wheels
will engage, providing added traction.
The rear wheels may momentarily slip or
move to engage the system, and the system will only engage up to approximately
4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the
system should be turned OFF and driving
resumed.

The Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when
the E-Lock system is ON. Also, the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled
light illuminates when the
and the
E-Lock system is ON.

WARNING
∙ Never leave the E-Lock system ON
when driving on paved or hardsurfaced roads. Turning the vehicle
may result in the rear wheels slipping
and result in an accident and personal
injury. After using the E-Lock system
to free the vehicle, turn the system
OFF.

CAUTION
∙ After using the E-Lock system, turn
the switch OFF to prevent possible
damage to driveline components
from extended use.
∙ Do not drive the vehicle at speeds
faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) when
the system is engaged. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
∙ Do not turn on the E-lock system
while the tires are spinning. Doing so
could
damage
drivetrain
components.

Starting and driving 5-33

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
automatic transmission (A/T) models
or in an appropriate gear for manual
transmission (M/T) models. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result
in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as
it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.

5-34 Starting and driving

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
A/T models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.

A :
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
B:
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C :
CURB 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,
you will still have control of the vehicle.
However, much greater steering effort is
needed, especially in sharp turns and at
low speeds.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.

Starting and driving 5-35

WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake

5-36 Starting and driving

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)
SYSTEM
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally but without anti-lock
assistance.

Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.

∙ The ABLS system uses automatic braking to transfer power from a slipping
drive wheel to the wheel on the same
axle with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping
wheel, which helps redirect power to
the other wheel.
∙ On 4WD models the ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD
mode is engaged, the ABLS system operates for both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the ABLS system operates on the
drive axle only.
∙ The ABLS system is always ON. In some
conditions, the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off. If the system is automatically turned off, normal
brake function will continue. ABLS will
function even when the VDC system is
turned OFF.
∙ The ABLS does not operate if both
wheels on a drive axle are slipping.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-37

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
WARNING
∙ The ABLS system helps provide increased traction, but will not prevent
accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN approved for your vehicle
or are extremely deteriorated, the
ABLS system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the
slip indicator light may illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the
slip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the ABLS system may not operate
properly and the slip indicator light
may illuminate.

The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control function).
∙ If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into
indicator light will come
4LO the
on and the VDC system will be turned
off. For additional information, refer to
“Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in this section.
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)

5-38 Starting and driving

The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
indicator illumiVDC system. The
nates to indicate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
indicator flashes if this ocwheel. The
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
indicator will not flash.
the
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,
indicator light will come on in the
the
instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator
lights are off.

Starting and driving 5-39

∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
indicator and
light
the
may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated,
both
and
indicator light may
the
illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.

5-40 Starting and driving

∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the four wheels depending
on the radius of the turn.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
indicator may flash or
the
the
indicator
light
may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
indicator and
light
the
may illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the
and
indicator
light
may
illuminate.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
the
indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
indicator may
properly and the
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent
control system to control vehicle
speed when driving on steep downhill
grades. Always drive carefully and attentively when using the hill descent
control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or
extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle
and possible serious injury or death.
∙ The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under
all load or road conditions. Always be
prepared to depress the brake pedal
to control vehicle speed. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
The hill descent control system helps
maintain vehicle speed when driving under
15-21 mph (25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill descent control is useful
when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to control
vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

centrate on steering while reducing the
burden of brake and accelerator operation.
∙ When additional braking is required on
steep downhill roads, activate the hill
descent control system by pushing the
switch on. For additional information,
refer to “Hill descent control switch” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
∙ Once the system is activated, the indicator light will remain on in the instrument panel. For additional information,
refer to “Hill descent control system ON
indicator light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating
temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or
brake pedal is released, the hill descent
control system begins to function again if
the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
For the best results, when descending
steep downhill grades, the hill descent control switch should be on and the shift lever
in 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine
braking.

Starting and driving 5-41

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward on a hill. Always
drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill
on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of
the vehicle and possible serious injury
or death.
∙ The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll backwards and may
result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
∙ The hill start assist may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards on
a hill under all load or road conditions.
Always be prepared to depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.

5-42 Starting and driving

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so
equipped)
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied. This helps prevents the
vehicle from rolling backward in the time it
takes the driver to release the brake pedal
and apply the accelerator.
Hill start assist will operate automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ The shift lever is shifted to a forward or
reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
back and hill start assist will stop operating
completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the
shift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P
(Park) or on a flat and level road.

WSD0103

WARNING
∙ Always turn and look back before
backing up. The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures.
∙ Read and understand the limitations
of the rear sonar system as contained
in this section. Inclement weather
may affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
∙ This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving
objects.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper, and
may not detect objects close to the
bumper or on the ground.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
rear bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may
be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the
shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may
not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft
(1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper (refer to the illustration
for approximate zone coverage areas). As
you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of
the tone increases. When the obstacle is
less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will
sound continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further than
10 in (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle,

the tone will sound for only 3 seconds.
Once the system detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again.
The RSS automatically turns on when the
shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the
ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the
instrument panel allows the driver to turn
the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the
ignition must be ON, and the shift lever in R
(Reverse). An indicator light on the switch
will illuminate when the system is turned
off. If the indicator light illuminates when
the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a
malfunction in the RSS.
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear
bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt (do not clean
the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect the accuracy
of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).

ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

Starting and driving 5-43

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

5-44 Starting and driving

Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

the

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.

∙ Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist
with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
or lower.

WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault
Interrupt
(GFI)
protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.

Starting and driving 5-45

MEMO

5-46 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle recovery
(freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-14
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-19

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)

WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

6-2 In case of emergency

The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.

The first aid kit is located in the under-seat
storage bins.
To access the first aid kit:

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)

LCE0108

King Cab® model
For King Cab® model, lift up the rear jump
seat and remove net to remove the first aid
kit. For additional information, refer to
“Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.

LCE0113

Crew Cab model
For Crew Cab model, lift up the rear bench
seat and remove the net to remove the first
aid kit. For additional information, refer to
“Folding the rear bench seat up” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the
odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS
will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section,
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and Driving” section
of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

In case of emergency 6-3

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.

6-4 In case of emergency

∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or
the automatic transmission into P
(Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142

Blocks

Flat tire

LCE0109

Getting the spare tire and tools
(King Cab® models)

Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.

LCE0110

2. Release the strap to remove the tool
bag.

The tool storage compartment is located
between the two rear jump seats.
1. Turn the knob from the lock to the unlock position and remove the lid from
the tool storage compartment.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-5

LCE2164

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the
storage location by inserting the wheel
nut wrench into the jack screw at the
top of the jack as shown. Turn the
wheel-nut wrench counterclockwise
as shown until the jack screw becomes
loose. Then loosen the jack with your
fingers until it becomes free.
4. Remove the jack.
5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reverse
steps 1 to 4.

LCE2159

Getting the spare tire and tools
(Crew Cab models)
The tools and tool bag are located behind
the rear bench seat.
1. Remove the head restraints/headrests
and fold the rear bench seat down. For
additional information, refer to “Folding
the rear bench seat down ” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this
manual.
2. Remove the tool bag and locate the
wheel-nut wrench.

6-6 In case of emergency

LCE2165

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the
storage location by inserting the
wheel-nut wrench into the jack screw
as shown and turning the wheel-nut
wrench towards you until the jack becomes loose. Then loosen the jack
screw with your fingers until it is free.
4. Remove the jack from behind the seat.
5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reverse
steps 1 to 4.

tire winch and turn the jacking rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare
tire.
2. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove
the retainer chain, and carefully slide
the tire from under the rear of the vehicle.

LCE2022

3. To reinstall the wheel, remove the center cap and insert the tire chain
through the wheel. Be sure the rubber
spacer is centered on the wheel before
lifting. Use the assembled jacking rod
to slowly rotate the winch clockwise to
raise the wheel to the vehicle.
WCE0070

Getting the spare tire and tools
(All models)
1. Seat the T-shaped end of the jacking
rod into the T-shaped opening of the
spare tire winch. Apply pressure to keep
the jacking rod engaged in the spare

In case of emergency 6-7

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to “Jacking
up vehicle and removing the damaged tire”
in this section.

Inspect the spacer every six years and
replace as necessary. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.

Take care not to scratch the wheel cap or
wheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire

CAUTION
∙ Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then
lift the spare tire.

WARNING

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allow
the chain to get stuck on the wheel
nut holes.

LCE2367

Removing bolt-on wheel caps (if
so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
The wheel cap 䊊 is only attached with the
wheel nuts and is separate from the wheel
2 .
䊊
1

To remove the wheel cap, remove the
wheel nuts after the jack is securely supporting the vehicle and the tire clears the
ground.

6-8 In case of emergency

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

WCE0152

Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.

In case of emergency 6-9

2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head under
the arrow stamped on the side of the
frame or rear as shown.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.

The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

LCE0087

3. Install the assembled jacking rod into
the jack as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the
jacking lever and rod. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground.

6-10 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illus5 ,䊊
6 ). Lower the
1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
trated (䊊
vehicle completely .

WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
WCE0063

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 620 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening.
5. Securely store the jacking equipment
in the vehicle and the flat tire under the
vehicle. For additional information
about storing the flat tire, refer to “Getting the spare tire and tools” in this section.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
1 ,䊊
2 ,䊊
3 ,䊊
4 ,䊊
5 ,䊊
6 )
sequence illustrated (䊊
until they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-11

JUMP STARTING

WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Doit-yourself ” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.

WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

6-12 In case of emergency

∙ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (if
so equipped) may come on at any
time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To avoid injury, keep hands and other objects
away from it.

CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.

LCE2223

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater,
air conditioner, etc.).

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the seA ,䊊
B ,䊊
C ,䊊
D ).
quence illustrated (䊊

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.

In case of emergency 6-13

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
3-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started.
Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
∙ For manual transmission models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to
collide with the tow vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while
the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission).
Do not stop the engine.

6-14 In case of emergency

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running.
Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional
and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment
could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN
dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and
procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage
to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator
carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing — 4WD with automatic transmission,” “Flat towing — 2WD with automatic
transmission” and “Flat towing — 2WD/4WD
with manual transmission” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-15

LCE2141

4WD models with automatic
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models equipped with
an automatic transmission with any of
the wheels on the ground as this may
cause serious and expensive damage
to the transfer case and transmission.

6-16 In case of emergency

CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on
the ground (if you do not use towing
dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
– Always release the parking brake.
– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
LCE2310

4WD models with manual
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put
the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
For 4WD vehicles, always tow with the
transfer case in the 2 HI position.

Your vehicle speed should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your vehicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle
the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

– For 4WD vehicles, always tow with
the transfer case in the 2 HI
position.
– Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
more information.

In case of emergency 6-17

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).

LCE2311

2WD models with automatic
transmission
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
∙ Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage
to the transmission. If it is necessary
to tow the vehicle with the front
wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.
∙ When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:

6-18 In case of emergency

– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
– Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(805 km)

LCE2310

2WD models with manual
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illustrated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put
the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
Your vehicle speed should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your vehicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle
the engine with the transmission in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

gine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission. For additional
information, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
There are two options to recover a stuck
vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional
information regarding these options,
please refer to the following sections.

– Always release the parking brake.

In case of emergency 6-19

Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
∙ Attach recovery devices only to main
structural members of the vehicle or
the recovery hooks.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.

6-20 In case of emergency

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (automatic transmission models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (manual transmission
models).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (automatic
transmission models) or 1st and R
(manual transmission models).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . .
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . .

7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

WAXING

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.

Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

CAUTION

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.

Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s
natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precautions:

∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
LAI2085

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or
backwards.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

Appearance and care 7-5

Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position (automatic transmission models) or the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position (manual
transmission models) and with the
parking brake fully applied, position the
floor mat in the floorwell so that the
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.

7-6 Appearance and care

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position (automatic
transmission models) or the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position (manual
transmission models) and with the
parking brake applied, fully apply and
release all pedals. The floor mat must
not interfere with pedal operation or
prevent the pedal from returning to its
normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.

LAI2042

Positioning hooks
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION

freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.

∙ The
accumulation
of
moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.

Temperature

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.

Relative humidity

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you consult
a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
5-speed automatic transmission
(if so equipped) fluid (ATF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Key fob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.

WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift lever to N (Neutral). For Automatic Transmission (A/T)
move the shift lever to P (Park)
∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

∙ If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.

∙ Never leave the engine or the transmission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.

This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.

∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced
because the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is off.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.

You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
Fuse/Fusible link box
Fuse box
Air cleaner
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir
Drive belt location
Radiator cap
Power steering fluid reservoir
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir

WDI0643

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VQ40DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

LII0167

8-4 Do-it-yourself

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
Fuse/Fusible link box
Fuse box
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Drive belt location
Radiator cap
Power steering fluid reservoir
Battery
Engine coolant reservoir

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.

WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer
to the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2831

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
B , add coolant
level is below the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty,
to the MAX level 䊊
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
A .
level 䊊

8-6 Do-it-yourself

For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this
section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

ENGINE OIL

LDI0437

VQ40DE

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.

LDI0467

QR25DE

LDI0371

5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
B . This is the
(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊
normal operating oil level range. If the
A ,
oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊
remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening.
C .
Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.

LDI2832

VQ40DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

LDI2833

QR25DE
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
A by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
B.
plug 䊊
5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench
by turning it counterclockwise and
completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.

WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

B with an oil filter
5. Loosen the oil filter 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.

CAUTION
LDI2865

QR25DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
LDI2834

VQ40DE

8-10 Do-it-yourself

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
filter.
A the plate covering the oil
4. Unscrew 䊊
filter exposing the filter. (For VQ40DE
engine)

Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Install the plate covering the oil filter.
(For VQ40DE engine)
11. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
FLUID (ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID

When checking or replacement is required,
it is recommend that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.
∙ Recommended fluid is Genuine
NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

CAUTION
∙ Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not
available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
may also be used.
∙ Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may
damage the automatic transmission,
which is not covered by the NISSAN
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The specified automatic transmission fluid
is also described on caution labels located
in the engine compartment.

WDI0256

The fluid level should be checked using the
HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid
reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° 176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAX
range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add
Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to HOT
MAX or COLD MAX depending on system
fluid temperature. Remove the cap and fill
through the opening.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
For additional information on brake fluid
specification, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and
clutch (if so equipped) systems. The
use of improper fluids can damage
the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of reach of
children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

LDI2835

BRAKE FLUID

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If
B or the
the fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊
brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
A .
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊
If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The
brake fluid reservoir is shared with the
clutch hydraulic system for manual transB,
missions. If the level is below the MIN line 䊊
or the brake warning light comes on, add
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake
Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the
A . If fluid must be added freMAX line 䊊
quently, the system should be checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher reservoir to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
LDI3136

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped) comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.

CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution. This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer reservoir with washer fluid concentrates
at full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the windshield-washer
reservoir.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

BATTERY
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Any corrosion should be washed off
with a solution of baking soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WARNING
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WDI0224

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect
the battery case.

WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT
A is located near the
The current sensor 䊊
battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.

WDI0639

LDI0454

CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

VQ40DE

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Power steering fluid pump pulley
Automatic belt tensioner pulley
Cooling fan pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Generator pulley
WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive
belt.
The
engine
could
rotate
unexpectedly.

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition and tension in accordance
with the maintenance schedule found
in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.

LDI0461

QR25DE

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Power steering fluid pump pulley
Water pump pulley
Air conditioner compressor pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Generator pulley

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
(QR25DE models)
It is not necessary to replace platinumA spark plugs as frequently as contipped 䊊
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

AIR CLEANER
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs
(VQ40DE models)
It is not necessary to replace iridiumA spark plugs as frequently as contipped 䊊
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

WDI0686

VQ40DE
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this
manual. When replacing the filter, wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and
the cover with a damp cloth.
To remove the VQ40DE air cleaner filter:
1
䊊

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Unlatch the clips and remove the air
cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner
filter.

LDI0465

QR25DE
To remove the QR25DE air cleaner filter:
A ,䊊
B ,䊊
C .
1. Unlatch the clips 䊊

2. Push down half of air cleaner to clear
the bottom retainers.
3. Lift up on half of air cleaner to remove
the air cleaner filter

WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with the
air cleaner removed, and be careful
when working on the engine with the
air cleaner removed.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.

LDI0442

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information on change
intervals, refer to the "Maintenance and
schedules" section of this manual.
To replace the filter, perform the following
procedure:
1. Open the glove box and press in on the
sides so that it will open completely allowing it to hang by the cord.

LDI2047
1 .
2. Gently lift up on the tab 䊊

3. Pull the filter cover toward you and then
2 .
down 䊊

3 .
4. Remove the old filter 䊊

NOTE:
The filter is marked with air flow arrows.
The end of the filter with the arrow
should face the rear of the vehicle. The
arrows should face downward.
5. Insert the new filter into the housing
and slide it over to the right.

Do-it-yourself 8-19

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
6. Replace the filter cover. The cover will
click into place under the tab.
7. Install the glove box door.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

LDI2725

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
A , and
2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊
B
then move the wiper blade down 䊊
the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.

8-20 Do-it-yourself

BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.

Self-adjusting brakes

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

∙ Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.

WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

LDI3120

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the windshieldwasher nozzle . This may cause clogging or
improper windshield-washer operation. If
wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a
1 .
needle or small pin 䊊

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

FUSES
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
LDI0455

A is
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
used in the fuse boxes in the engine comB is used in the passenger
partment. Type 䊊
compartment fuse box.
A fuses are provided as spare fuses.
Type 䊊
They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type 䊊 fuses can be installed in the engine
compartment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.
A

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LDI0457

A fuse is used to replace a type 䊊
B
If a type 䊊
A fuse will not be level with
fuse, the type 䊊
the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.
This will not affect the performance of the
fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the
fuse box securely.
B fuses cannot be installed in the
Type 䊊
A
underhood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊
fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center
of the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.
LDI2838

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

LDI2826

A , replace it with a
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
new fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check
the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

LDI2839

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

LDI0456

A , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
equivalent good fuse 䊊

5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall fuse box
cover.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
How to replace the extended storage
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage
switch, be sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF or LOCK position.

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the
OFF position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
A found on
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
each side of the storage switch.

LDI2736

5. Pull the storage switch straight out
B.
from the fuse box 䊊

Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch
and check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as it could cause a
malfunction.
∙ When changing the battery, do not let
dust or oil get on the key fob.
∙ There is danger of explosion if a lithium
battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
4
䊊

Close the lid securely.

5. Press
the
button,
then
the
button two or three times to
check the key fob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
∙ An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as follows:
1
䊊
2
䊊

A .
Open the lid using a coin 䊊
B.
Remove the battery 䊊

8-26 Do-it-yourself

3
䊊

LDI0484

C with the “+” facInstall a new battery 䊊
ing down.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points
will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

∙ The key fob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
∙ The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.

LIGHTS
FCC Notice:

HEADLIGHTS

For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.

Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This devise complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
∙ DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time
as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the
performance of the headlight.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the rear end of the bulb.
A counter4. Turn the bulb retaining ring 䊊
clockwise until it is free from the headlight reflector and then remove it.

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do
B when
not shake or rotate the bulb 䊊
removing it.

Replacing the headlight bulb
1. Insert the bulb.
DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE
HANDS.
2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

WDI0294

Removing the headlight bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb
If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.

CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Be sure the lip of the bulb socket contacts the headlight body.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.

3. Push the electrical connector into the
bulb plastic base until it snaps and
stops.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.

5. Close the hood.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly*
High/Low
60/55
HB5
Turn/Park
28/8
7444NA
Side marker
3.8
194
Fog lights* (if so equipped)
55
H11
Map light
8
—
Room light
8
—
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)
—
—
High-mounted stop light/Cargo light*
12.8
912
Rear combination light*
Turn
27
3156AK
Stop/Tail
27/8
3157K
Back-up
18
921
License plate light*
5
W5W
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

LDI0713

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Map light
Room light
High-mounted stop light/Cargo
light
License plate light
Rear combination light
Fog light (if so equipped)
Headlight assembly

Do-it-yourself 8-29

: Indicates bulb removal
: Indicates bulb installation

LDI0478

Map light
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊

WDI0306

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover using a cloth and suitable
tool.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

To replace the license plate light:
1. Apply force as shown in image to remove tension that locks bulb assembly
to the bumper.
2. Pivot bulb assembly away from bumper to release fully.
3. Rotate the bulb retainer as shown in
the image.
4. Pull the bulb out to remove and replace.
*Left side assembly is shown. Right
side assembly is mirror.

WDI0300

Rear combination light

LDI3134

License plate light

Do-it-yourself 8-31

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)

Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed in the odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example, a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv8-32 Do-it-yourself

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly
and
cause
an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.

∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-33

5
䊊
6
䊊

Tire and Loading Information
label
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
8-34 Do-it-yourself

4
䊊

LDI2007

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
Spare tire size.

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the
Tire and Loading Information label.

LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.

Size

Cold Tire
Inflation
Pressure

Front Original Tire:
235/75R15
P265/70R16
240 kPa, 35 PSI
P265/75R16
P265/60R18
Rear Original Tire:
235/75R15
240 kPa, 35 PSI
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/60R18
Spare Tire:
Full size

6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the
tire identification number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
8-36 Do-it-yourself

WDI0395

1
䊊

Example

Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
LDI2786

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)
䊊
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.

Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).

4 Maximum permissible inflation
䊊
pressure

7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.

Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.

5 Maximum load rating
䊊

In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

Other Tire-related Terminology

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire
size. Other types may damage your vehicle.
Use chain tensioners when recommended
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow

TIRE CHAINS

Do-it-yourself 8-39

Wheel nut tightening torque:

damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
Use only the 2WD range when driving on
clear paved roads.

∙
WDI0258

∙

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

∙

For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
in this manual.

∙

As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
8-40 Do-it-yourself

WARNING
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

ing capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may
lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.
∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-

Do-it-yourself 8-41

∙ If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad wear. For additional information
on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case
and differential gears.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.

Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.

Do-it-yourself 8-43

MEMO

8-44 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8
Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to
work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the

secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the
vehicle is held securely with the shift lever
in the P (Park) position without applying any
brakes.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
The fluid should be at the bottom of the
filler opening. Vehicles operated in high
temperatures or under severe conditions
require frequent checks of the battery fluid
level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine. Wait more than
15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the
oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with
the engine off. Check the lines for proper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the
floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the
underbody should be thoroughly flushed
with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, refer to
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to
“General maintenance” in this section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” section
of this manual.

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,
deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any
deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under “Explanation of general
maintenance items” in this section. When
rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.

STANDARD MAINTENANCE
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be required.
After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.

After
120,000
miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals.

NOTE:

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS

For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using
a car-top carrier.

Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12

15
(24)
18

20
(32)
24

I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I*
R
I*
I*

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I*

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Drive belts
Air cleaner filter
EVAP vapor lines
Fuel lines
Fuel filter
Engine coolant*
Engine oil
Engine oil filter
Spark plugs
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I*

75
(120)
90

80
(128)
96
I*
I*
I*

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I*
I*
R
I*
I*

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I*

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I*
R
I*
I*

R
R

See NOTE (3)
See NOTE (4)(5)
R
R
See NOTE (6)
See NOTE (7)

R
R

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines & cables
Brake pads & rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
Automatic transmission fluid
Manual transmission gear oil
Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)夝
Tire rotation
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
See NOTE (2)
See NOTE (2)

5
(8)
6

10
(16)
12
I
I

15
(24)
18

I
I
I
I

20
(32)
24
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
25
30
35
40
(40)
(48)
(56)
(64)
30
36
42
48
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

45
(72)
54

50
(80)
60
I
I
I
I
I
I

55
(88)
66

60
(96)
72
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I
R

I
R

MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Brake lines & cables
Brake pads & rotors夝
Brake fluid夝
Automatic transmission fluid
Manual transmission gear oil
Differential gear oil
Transfer fluid
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)夝
Tire rotation
Exhaust system夝
In-cabin microfilter

miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months

See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
See NOTE (2)
See NOTE (2)

65
(104)
78

70
(112)
84
I
I

75
(120)
90

I
I
I
I

80
(128)
96
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95
100
(136)
(144)
(152)
(160)
102
108
114
120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

105
(168)
126

110
(176)
132
I
I
I
I
I
I

115
(184)
138

120
(192)
144
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I

See NOTE (3)
I
R

I
R

NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF (or their
equivalents) may cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission. Damage caused by the use of other fluids is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every
20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under
severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).

∙ Operating in hot weather in stopand-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Brake fluid
Brake pads & rotors
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)
Exhaust system

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance operation
Replace
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a
car-top carrier.

Maintenance interval
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation
(for QR25DE engine models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Fuel recommendation
(for VQ40DE models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel
recommendation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
When traveling or registering in another
country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-16
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Installing front license plate with
grommets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Installing front license plate without
grommets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Utili-track® channel system
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Crew cab models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Flat towing – 4WD with automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Flat towing – 2WD with automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Flat towing – 2WD/4WD with manual
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Fuel

Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional
information, refer to
“Engine” in the “Do-ityourself” section of
this manual.

80 L

21-1/8 gal

17-5/8 gal

With oil filter
change

4.6 L

4-7/8 qt

4 qt

Without oil
filter change

4.3 L

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

With oil filter
change

5.1 L

5-3/8 qt

4-1/2 qt

Without oil
filter change

4.8 L

5-1/8 qt

4-1/4 qt

9.4 L
10.2 L

2-1/2 gal
2-3/4 gal

2-1/8 gal
2-1/4 gal

5 M/T

2.9 L

3-1/8 qt

2-1/2 qt

6 M/T 4X2

4.0 L

4-1/4 qt

3-1/2 qt

6 M/T 4X4

4.2 L

4-1/2 qt

3-3/4 qt

QR25DE

VQ40DE

Engine coolant
(with reservoir)

Manual transmission gear oil

QR25DE
VQ40DE

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendations (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)” or “Flexible
Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation (if so equipped)”
in this section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent
motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity.
For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation” in this section.
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN” is
recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent
motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity.
For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation” in this section.
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ
Multi 75W-85
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ
Multi is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may
be used as a temporary replacement. However, use
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ
Multi as soon as it is available.

Fluid type

Automatic transmission fluid

Transfer fluid

Front final drive oil

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself ” section.

2.0 L

2-1/8 qt

1-3/4 qt

0.85 L

1-3/4 pt

1-1/2 pt

Rear final drive oil (except for 6 speed M/T or E-Lock vehicles)

1.6 L

3-3/8 pt

2-7/8 pt

Rear final drive oil (for 6 speed M/T or E-Lock vehicles)

2.0 L

4-1/4 pt

3-1/2 pt

Power Steering Fluid (PSF)

—

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

—

Multi-purpose grease

—

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
in NISSAN automatic transmissions. If Genuine NISSAN
Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
may also be used. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF
or Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of other
automatic transmission fluids is not covered under the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended
• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF may
cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,
and may damage the transfer. Damage caused by the
use of other fluids is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5
80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5
synthetic 75W-90 or equivalent
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil synthetic 75W-140 or API
GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140
• Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or
equivalent DOT 3
*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
• NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)
Metric
US
Imperial
Measure
Measure
Measure

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

Air conditioning system oil

—

4.5 L

1-1/4 gal

1 gal

Windshield-washer fluid

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for
QR25DE engine models)
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specification label” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KLH00-PAGR0)
or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specification label” in this section.
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate
Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.

CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, have a
NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of
the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above

10-6 Technical and consumer information

symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for
VQ40DE models)
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control
devices and systems of the vehicle.
Damage caused by such fuel is not
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
∙ E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be
used. Damage caused by such fuel is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your
vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified with small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation
or the appropriate percentage for that region.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL
RECOMMENDATION (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel
Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels
combined.
U.S. government regulations require Fuel
Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a
small, square, orange and black label
with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

CAUTION
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage or a
loss of vehicle performance.
Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will cause damage to the three-way
catalyst.

General information
This information is for Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(FFV) only. FFV vehicles can be identified by
the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol
(E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are
unique to Flexible Fuel Vehicles.

CAUTION
Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING
∙ Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury.
∙ Never have any smoking materials lit
in or near the vehicle when removing
the fuel filler cap or filling the tank.
∙ Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent
and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded
regular gasoline with an octane rating of at
least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91), or E-85 fuel, or
any mixture of these two.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

For the best starting and vehicle driveability results, do not continually switch between E-85 and unleaded regular gasoline.
If you must switch fuels, NISSAN recommends the following:

Fuel consumption

∙ do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per
gallon than gasoline, you will experience an
increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your fuel mileage to decrease by
about 30% compared to gasoline operation.

∙ add more than 5 gallons of fuel

Replacement parts

∙ operate the vehicle immediately after
refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible
with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

NOTE:
When the ambient temperature is above
90°F (32°C), you may experience hard
starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of
0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience
an increase in the time it takes for you engine to start, and a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.

CAUTION
Replacing fuel system components
with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle and
may also affect the warranty coverage.
Maintenance
If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel,
follow the correct maintenance log shown
in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION
Do not use ethanol mixture greater
than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause
difficulty in cold starting and may affect
driveability.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
LTI2061

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.

Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-

Technical and consumer information 10-11

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS

Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.

The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.

Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ towing a trailer
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service.
A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

QR25DE

Idle speed
M/T
A/T in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)

VQ40DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder in-line
in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0)
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)
1–3–4–2

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)
241.27 (3,954)
1–2–3–4–5–6

Refer to the “Emission control information label” on the underside of the hood.

Standard PLZKAR6A-11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Timing chain

DILFR5A-11
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 10-13

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Wheel Type

Offset in (mm)

Size

Steel

0.79 (20)

15 x 6.5JJ

Steel

1.18 (30)

16 x 7JJ

Aluminum

1.18 (30)

16 x 7J

Aluminum

1.18 (30)

18 x 7.5J

Tires

Size
235/75R15
P265/70R16
P265/75R16
P265/60R18

Spare tire

Size

Steel

Full size

Alloy

Full size

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Overall length
Short wheel base
Long wheel base
Overall width
Overall height
With roof rack
Without roof rack
S and SV I-4 King Cab® models
SV, DR and Pro-4X King Cab®
models
Crew Cab models
Track Width
Front and rear
Wheelbase
Short wheel base
Long wheel base
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)

205.5 (5,220)
219.4 (5,574)
72.8 (1,850)

in (mm)

73.9 (1,878)

in (mm)
in (mm)

68.7 (1,745)
69.7 (1,770)

in (mm)

70.1 (1,780)

in (mm)

61.8 (1,570)

in (mm)
126.0 (3,200)
in (mm)
139.7 (3,550)
lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.
V.S.S. certification label” on
lbs. (kg) the center pillar between
lbs. (kg) the driver’s side front and
rear doors.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

LTI0130

LTI0085

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The VIN plate is attached as shown. This
number is the identification for your vehicle
and is used in the vehicle registration.

QR25DE engine

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

LTI0127

LTI0135

VQ40DE engine

Type A (if so equipped)

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

WTI0099

Type B (if so equipped)

LTI2252

LTI0133

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.

WTI0100

Type B (if so equipped)

Type A (if so equipped)

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
2. Mount the license plate using two M614 mm bolts.
License plate bolt tightening torque:
3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WITHOUT GROMMETS
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate without grommets:

LTI0206

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown.

LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WITH GROMMETS
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate with grommets:
1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a
0.37 in (9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure
to the drill. Insert two plastic grommets
provided. Install the license plate holder
using the two bolts (and washers) provided.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

1. Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher at the location mark (small
dimple) using a 0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To
avoid damaging the threads behind
the finisher, apply only light pressure to
the drill.
2. Mount the license plate bracket using
two 8 mm slotted hex head screws.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this
section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.
LTI0152

Example

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in
step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.
For additional information, refer to
“Measurement of weights” in this
section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional information, refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information label” in the “Do-ityourself ” section of this manual.

LTI0102

SECURING THE LOAD
For your convenience, tie down hooks (if so
equipped) are placed at each corner of the
truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

WARNING

∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal
injury.

∙ Properly install and tighten the tiedown cleats into the Utili-track® channel system. Also, do not attach any
rope or straps directly to the channel.
Failure to properly install the tiedown cleats or attaching ropes or
straps directly to the channel can
cause the cargo to become unsecured. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
LTI2082

UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
1. Side channels
2. Header channel
3. Floor channels

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
The Utili-track® channel system allows you
to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the
best location to secure a load.
The tie-down cleats must be installed so
the clamp is properly seated in the notches
in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated
in the notches, it will not be flush with the
rail and cannot be properly tightened. The
bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)

10-22 Technical and consumer information

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat
periodically during a trip to make sure the
center bolt has not become loose.
Install the tie-down cleat as follows:
1. Remove the side channels by sliding
them out the back of the truck bed.
Properly store the side channels.
2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

LTI0103

3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicular to the channel as shown.
Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and
slide it to the desired location.

LTI0104

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the
bottom fully seat into the channel detents.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

WTI0124

5. There should be no gap between the
bottom of the cleat and the top of the
channel. Tighten the center bolt hand
tight (20-40 in-lbs.).

10-24 Technical and consumer information

LTI0106

CAUTION
∙ Install only one cleat per section of
channel.
∙ Applying loads at angles to the cleats
greater than 45° or loads greater than
150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or
200 lbs. (side channels) may cause
damage to the channel or bed.

Technical and consumer information 10-25

LTI0123

1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

WARNING
Do not install accessories over the gap
between the front and rear side channels. Doing this could affect the rear
structure in certain rear impacts, which
could result in serious injury.

WTI0119

CAUTION
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting. Use the channel end stoppers to
help secure items in the channels from
sliding off the end of the truck bed.

Channel end stoppers (if so
equipped)
The channel end stoppers should be used
to help prevent accessories installed in the
channels from sliding or shifting off the end
of the truck bed.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

They must be installed so they are properly
seated in the detents in the channel.
Install the channels end stoppers as follows:
1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed.
Properly store the channel protectors.
2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the
end stopper with the provided wrench
and insert it into the channel.
3. Position the end stopper to the desired
location on the channel so the nubs on
the bottom of the end stopper fully
seat into the channel detents.
4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the
end stopper with the provided wrench.

WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury.
Failures
caused
by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.

LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
Technical and consumer information 10-27

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
INFORMATION
CREW CAB MODELS
Crew Cab short wheel base models
should not be used to carry a slide-in
camper.

KING CAB® MODELS
This information is provided for you to
properly install a slide-in camper and is
based on the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration regulations. It is recommended that, before installing the
camper, you carefully read the following information and ensure that the camper
meets the specifications.

LTI0128

This information may not apply to some
Canada model vehicles.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF
GRAVITY

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES

The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location.

Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manual does not cover these options.
For additional information, refer to the
body manufacturer’s instruction manual.

King Cab®:
L1 = 36.7 in (931 mm)

LTI0129

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in
camper, the total cargo load of the truck
consists of the camper manufacturer’s
weight figure, plus:
∙ the weight of installed additional
camper equipment not included in the
camper manufacturer’s weight figure,
∙ the weight of camper cargo,

WARNING
Improper loading may be dangerous. If
a load is too far back, it can affect handling characteristics. If a load is too far
forward, the front axle may be
overloaded.

10-28 Technical and consumer information

∙ and the weight of occupants in the
camper.

TOWING A TRAILER
The total cargo load should not exceed the
truck’s pay load weight rating and the
camper’s center of gravity should fall within
the truck’s recommended center of gravity
location when installed.

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can
adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to
accidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY
The vehicle payload weight capacity
shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label, refer to “Tire and Loading Information
label” in this section, indicates the maximum total weight of passengers, optional
equipment (air conditioning, trailer hitch,
etc) and cargo that your vehicle is designed
to carry.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to ’’Vehicle loading information’’ in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to
the Tire and Loading Information label.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

WARNING

Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the GAWR. The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the
GVWR. These ratings are given on
the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move
or remove items to bring all weights
below the ratings.

Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION
∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 mile (805 km).
Your engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing
capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

Technical and consumer information 10-29

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads

Temperature conditions can also affect
towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
in high outside temperatures on graded
roads can affect engine performance and
cause overheating. The engine protection
mode, which helps reduce the chance of
engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle
speed may decrease under high load. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
∙ When towing a trailer load of
3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers
with a brake system MUST be used.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value
specified in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart.

WARNING
LTI0161

The GCWR equals the combined weight of
the towing vehicle (including passengers
and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely
affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery
boat ramps).

10-30 Technical and consumer information

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance
of a collision. Be especially careful when
driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a
safe driving speed, pull to the side of the
road in a safe area. Allow the engine to
cool and return to normal operation. For
additional information, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

WTI0160

Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
the trailer tongue load specified by the
trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue
load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
to allow for proper tongue load.

CA0036

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle
Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The GVW equals the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In
addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Technical and consumer information 10-31

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and
trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly
found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage
yards.
To determine the available payload capacity
for tongue load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all
of the passengers and cargo that are
normally in the vehicle when towing a
trailer.

To determine the available towing capacity,
use the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
"Towing Load/Specification" chart
found in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight
from the GCWR. The remaining amount
is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the
trailer when it is towed. Make sure the
Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the
Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the
trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
more than Front Gross Axle Weight and
Rear Gross Axle Weight on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The
cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GVWR. The remaining amount is
the available maximum tongue load.

10-32 Technical and consumer information

Example:
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale- including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg).
∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 5,815 lbs. (2638 kg).
∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification" chart
- 11,133 lbs. (5050 kg).
∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
“Towing Load/Specification" chart 6,100 lbs. (2767 kg).

5,815 lbs. (2638 kg)
– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg)

GVWR
GVW

= 630 lbs. (286 kg)

Available for tongue
weight

11,133 lbs. (5050 kg)

GCWR

– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg)

GVW

= 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Capacity available for
towing

shown in the “Towing Load/Specification”
chart even if the calculated available
tongue weight is greater than 15 percent. If
the calculated tongue weight is less than
10 percent, reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are
within the required ratings.

Trailer frontal area
CAUTION

630 lbs. (286 kg)
/ 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg)
=

Available tongue
weight
Available capacity
10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less
than the maximum towing capacity due to
the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
between 10 - 15 percent of the trailer weight
or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the
proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal
area specification may exceed the towing capacity of the vehicle. This may affect the towing performance and lead
to vehicle damage.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this
manual are for general reference only.
The safe towing capacity of your vehicle
is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and
cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle
and trailer as described in this manual
to determine the actual vehicle towing
capacity. Do not exceed the published
maximum towing capacity or the GCWR
or
the
GVWR
shown
on
the
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing
load of a trailer. The frontal area is the total
area of the vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resistance while towing. Do
not exceed the maximum trailer frontal
area specification shown in the "Towing
Load/Specification” chart. The frontal area
can be determined by multiplying the
width of the trailer by the height of the
trailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feet
wide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of
48 square feet.

Technical and consumer information 10-33

Maximum Towing Capacity*1,
*2, *3
Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3
Maximum Gross Combined
Weight Rating
Maximum trailer frontal area

King Cab® 2WD (4 cyl)

King Cab® 2WD (6 cyl)

King Cab® 4WD (6 cyl)

Crew Cab 2WD

Crew Cab 4WD

3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg)

6,500 lbs. (2,949 kg)

6,300 lbs. (2,858 kg)

6,100 lbs. (2,767 kg)

350 lbs. (158 kg)

650 lbs. (295 kg)

630 lbs. (285 kg)

610 lbs. (276 kg)

7,936 lbs. (3,600 kg)

11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg)

30sq feet (2.78 sq meters)

*1:
∙ The towing capacity is calculated using the SAE International SAE J2807 test method. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
∙ All towing above 1,000 lbs. (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes.
∙ NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lbs. (1,361 kg).
*2: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg) and 350 lbs. (158 kg)
tongue load.
*3: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.

10-34 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow
package includes a receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
maximum towing capacity of this vehicle
when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and
hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be
towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and
hitch balls are available from a NISSAN
dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or
receiver-type frame mounted hitch.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or
property damage due to sway caused by
crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than
the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating
of the hitch components. Doing so can
cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball
must be long enough to be properly
secured to the ball mount. There should
be at least 2 threads showing beyond
the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
and the ball mount is inserted into the
hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball
mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to
keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.

∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
balls also have the size printed on the
top of the ball.
∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball
based on the trailer weight.
∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball
shank should be no more than 1/16”
smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

Technical and consumer information 10-35

Weight carrying hitches

NOTE:

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
mount is one that is designed to carry the
whole amount of tongue weight and gross
weight directly on the ball mount and on
the receiver.

A weight-distributing hitch system may
affect the operation of trailer surge
brakes. If you are considering use of a
weight-distributing hitch system with a
surge brake-equipped trailer, check with
the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be
done.

Weight distribution hitch

LTI0132

Bumper towing
The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has provisions to install a trailer hitch ball and is
designed to tow trailers of a maximum
weight of 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg).
To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle
A , then
in the center of the step bumper 䊊
remove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

This type of hitch is also called a “loadleveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t
carry the full tongue weight of a given
trailer, and need some of the tongue
weight transferred through the frame and
pushing down on the front wheels. This
gives stability to the tow vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class
IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.
(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
equipment manufacturers to determine if
they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system.

10-36 Technical and consumer information

Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors
closed, allow the vehicle to stand for
several minutes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point
on the front and rear bumpers at the
center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the
front bumper height is within 0 .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference
height measured in step 2. The rear
bumper should be no higher than the
reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If
the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded,
the vehicle may handle unpredictably
which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or
property damage.

Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect
trailer handling. Sway control devices may
be used to help control these affects. If you
choose to use one, contact a reputable
trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway
control device will work with the vehicle,
hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
sway control device.

Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg).

Class II hitch

CAUTION

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).
The Genuine NISSAN step bumper is considered a Class II ball mount.

Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

∙ Special hitches which include frame
reinforcements are required for towing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Suitable
Genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts
and hitch balls for pickup trucks and
sport utility vehicles are available at a
NISSAN dealer.
∙ The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.

WARNING
∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

Class IV hitch
Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing
hitch should be used to tow trailers that
weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV
trailer hitch equipment that has a
10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in
the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in
this section.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
∙ To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting
bolts
are
securely
mounted.

Technical and consumer information 10-37

Tire pressures
∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the
trailer and tire manufacturer’s
specifications.

Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety
chains should be crossed and should be
attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle
bumper or axle. The safety chains can be
attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is
mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available
power-type module/converter must be
used to provide power for all trailer
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
light, stoplight and turn signal circuits
as
a
signal
source.
The
module/converter must draw no more
than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp
circuits.
Using
a
module/converter that exceeds these
power requirements may damage the
vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper
equipment and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer or reputable
trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the
optional trailer tow package are equipped
with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. A flat
4–pin harness is available from your dealer
for vehicles without a tow package. If your
trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connec-

10-38 Technical and consumer information

tor, an adapter will be needed to connect
the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are
available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.
Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer harness connector are pre-wired for a trailer
brake controller. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake
adapter harness.

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used. However, most
states require a separate braking system
on trailers with a loaded weight above a
specific amount. Make sure the trailer
meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.
Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator is
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel.
Surge brakes are activated by the trailer
pushing against the hitch ball when the
tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge
brakes are common on rental trailers and
some boat trailers. In this type of system,
there is no hydraulic or electric connection
for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric braking
systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer
brakes are used, refer to “Electric trailer
brake controller" in this section.
Have a professional supplier of towing
equipment make sure the trailer brakes are
properly installed and demonstrate proper
brake function testing.

Electric trailer brake controller
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may
require the installation of an aftermarket
trailer brake controller.

A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is available that is specifically designed to be used
when installing an aftermarket brake controller.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake
controller according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required
for towing before driving the vehicle.

Pre-towing tips
∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the
vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or
nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible
in the trailer to keep the trailer center of
gravity low.
∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%
of the trailer load is in the front half and
40% is in the back half. Also make sure
the load is balanced side to side.

∙ Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an
area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be
somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions.
∙ Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin
or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

Technical and consumer information 10-39

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand. Move
your hand in the direction in which you
want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible,
have someone guide you when you are
backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle
and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if you
must do so:

CAUTION
If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position before blocking the wheels
and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
indicator light (if so
6. Make sure the
equipped) indicates the transfer case is
in 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is
indicator light is flashing,
off. If the
or the ATP light is ON, make sure the
transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and
turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For
additional information, refer to “Automatic transmission park warning light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
7. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
wheels.

4. Release the parking brake.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
slowly release the brake pedal until the
blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the
blocks.

10-40 Technical and consumer information

∙ While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
maintain adequate control, reduce your
speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
long or repeated use of the brakes
when descending a hill, as this reduces
their effectiveness and could cause
overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises
to a high temperature, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s
first 500 miles (805 km).
∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
do tow, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified. For additional information, refer to “Maintenance Schedules” in the “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual.

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of the turn
than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal
turning radius during the turn.
∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When
being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to
sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer
as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help
stabilize the vehicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the
road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described in this section.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of
the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change
lanes.
∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower
gear for engine braking when driving
down steep or long hills. This will help
slow the vehicle without applying the
brakes.
∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
∙ Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances
while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise
control not be used while towing a
trailer.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break.
∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail
pipe or rear bumper.
∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer
lights before backing the trailer into the
water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer
to the “Do-it-yourself ” section in this
manual.

FLAT TOWING – 4WD WITH
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes
called flat towing.

∙ Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the
local speed limits.

Technical and consumer information 10-41

CAUTION
∙ DO NOT flat tow a 4WD vehicle
equipped with an automatic transmission. Flat towing or using a vehicle
dolly WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING – 2WD WITH
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes
called flat towing.

CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
∙ DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of
transmission lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly
manufacturer’s recommendations when
using their product.

FLAT TOWING – 2WD/4WD WITH
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes
called flat towing.

CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
∙ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.

10-42 Technical and consumer information

∙ Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
∙ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with
the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
∙ Your vehicle should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when flat towing your
vehicle.
∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start
and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure
to idle the engine after every 500 miles
(805 km) of towing may cause damage
to the transmission’s internal parts.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.

Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-43

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For Canada

For USA

Emission Control System Warranty

If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.

Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.

10-44 Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign.
However,
Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.

You
may
contact
Transport
Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-3330510. You may also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/
fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/
fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained
from Transport Canada’s Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/
securiteroutiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety
concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at
1-800-387-0122.

WARNING
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel
Drive (4WD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as
the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment. Make sure you inform the
test facility personnel that your vehicle
is equipped with 4WD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious
vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready condition” for an Inspection/
Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission
control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 10-45

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded

10-46 Technical and consumer information

.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-47

MEMO

10-48 Technical and consumer information

11 Index
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
5-Speed automatic transmission fluid
(ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
A
Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-89, 2-20
Air bag warning light,
supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89, 2-20
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . .4-22, 4-30
Air conditioner service. . . . . . . . . .4-32
Air conditioner specification label . .10-18
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18, 4-30
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-32
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-25

Anchor point locations. . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . .2-15
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-36
Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . .4-68, 4-69
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-57
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
iPod® Player. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62, 4-65
iPod® player operation . . . . . .4-62, 4-65
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Steering wheel audio control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . .2-51
Automatic transmission position
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Driving with automatic
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-16
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58

B
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43, 8-14
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Key fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25, 8-26
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-13
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . .4-68, 4-69
Bluetooth® hands-free phone system. .4-90
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without Navigation System . . . . . . . .4-78
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
Navigation System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-36
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-29
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-24, 8-21
Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-21
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-9
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-15
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-19
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
CD player
(See audio system) . . . . . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-57
Child restraints. . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-30
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-40, 1-56, 1-68
Top tether strap anchor point
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-33
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-24
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4
Clock set/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Clock setting (models with Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-43, 4-47, 4-49
Clutch
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . .2-38
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-16
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

11-2

Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-57
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Connect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-9
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
With navigation system . . . . . . .4-4, 4-5
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . .4-71
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18, 4-30
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Curtain side-impact and rollover air
bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-86
D
Daytime Running Light System. . . . . . .2-32
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-28
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-32

Display controls
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Driving with automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-19
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Emission control information label . . . .10-17
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-44
Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-13
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine compartment check
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-8
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-46
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2
Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-13
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-16
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-80
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . .10-6, 10-8
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . .10-4, 10-6
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

F
G
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-8
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9

Trip odometer . . .
Voltmeter. . . . . .
General maintenance
Glove box . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

. .2-4
. .2-8
. .9-2
.2-44

H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-90
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18, 4-30
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-21, 4-30
Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . . . .2-36
Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . .5-41
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-13
Important vehicle information label . . .10-16
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . .5-25

11-3

Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . .3-16
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-32
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-32
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62, 4-65
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
J
Jump seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 8-15
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Key fob battery replacement. . . . .8-25, 8-26
Keyless entry
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-7
Keys
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-18
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-16
Emission control information label . .10-17

11-4

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-15
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-16
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-17
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-15
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-88
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-18
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-89, 2-20
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-29
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-15
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-29
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-82
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-18
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . .2-48
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-19
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Malfunction indicator light. . . . . . . . . .2-22
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3
Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 2-41
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-32
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-16
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Rearview . . .
Vanity mirror
Mirrors . . . . . .
Mobile apps. . .
Moonroof . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.3-15
.3-15
.3-15
.4-72
.2-52

N
NissanConnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-13
NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . .4-100
O
Octane rating
(See fuel octane rating). . . . . . . . .10-6, 10-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
One shot call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81, 4-93
Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-45
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-14

Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-47
Owner's manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-47

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14

Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-77
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52
Steering wheel audio control switch . .4-71
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-45
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-39
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-28
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-46
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-12
Registering a vehicle in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . .3-6, 3-7
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-44
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-21
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-34
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-90
Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-35
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Precautions
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Precautions on booster
seats. . . . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-40, 1-56, 1-68
Precautions on child
restraints . . . . . . . . .1-28, 1-40, 1-56, 1-68
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7

11-5

S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . .1-28, 1-40, 1-56, 1-68
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-44
Seat
Jump seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-5
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24
Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-18
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-20
Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-13

11-6

Security systems
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-25
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-47
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Shifting
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-15
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-24
Side air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag, curtain
and rollover air bag systems) . . . . . . . .1-86
Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73
Smartphone connectivity . . . . . . . . . .4-72
Sonar
Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-88
Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-13
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 8-15
Precautions when starting and
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Steering
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-35

Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-71
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 2-43
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-88
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89, 2-20
Supplemental front impact air bag
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-88
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-73
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Automatic power window switch . . .2-51
Clutch interlock (clutch start)
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-29
Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . .2-36
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-32
Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Power door lock switch . . . . . .
Rear sonar system off switch . . .
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defroster switch . .
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .3-4
. . .2-39
. . .2-28
. . .2-28
. . .2-32

T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 3-18
Tailgate latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-23
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 5-13
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-17
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 8-32
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . .8-42
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-43
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 10-14
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-33

Towing
2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . .6-17, 6-18
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-41, 10-42
Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-33
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . .2-55,
2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59
Transmission
Driving with automatic
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Driving with manual transmission . . .5-19
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Troubleshooting guide
(NISSAN voice recognition system) . . . .4-104
Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 3-18
Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-43
USB interface
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . .4-59, 4-61
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-14
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-38
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-38
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-15
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-26, 5-13
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-19
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-26, 5-13
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . .4-81, 4-93
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . .4-100
Voltmeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
W
Warning
4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-89, 2-20
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-15
Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-17
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2
Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-18

11-7

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-82
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-18, 2-20
Supplemental air bag warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-89, 2-20
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-25
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-88
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Weights
(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-14
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32, 10-14
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14
When traveling or registering in another
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-51
Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Wiper
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28

11-8

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for
QR25DE models):
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for
VQ40DE models):
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV)
FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so
equipped):
If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to
use (E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded
regular gasoline or any percentage of the
two fuels combined.

CAUTION
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
QR25DE engine models:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN”
VQ40DE engine models:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this
manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : July 2017
Publication No.: OM18EA 0D40U0
Printed in U.S.A.

D40-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Create Date                     : 2017:07:05 10:32:03-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:09:29 09:22:25-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:09:29 09:22:25-05:00
Creator Tool                    : PDFL 7.0
Document ID                     : uuid:1F5945AB8E61E711AE03AB1CC29788FB
Instance ID                     : uuid:033980fb-ba6a-4085-9aa5-3d197256672e
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:5c5af1bd-0070-4e03-93e0-b709cd326ecb
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:14f2e1cf-bc2a-4760-9c52-7070883b773f
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2018 Nissan Frontier | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information | Nissan USA
Description                     : Download the 2018 Nissan Frontier Owner's Manual at the official Nissan USA website.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : nissan, frontier, 2018, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 498
Keywords                        : nissan;, frontier;, 2018;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, service;, maintenance
Warning                         : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionary

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2018 Nissan Frontier | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation